Chevrolet 1998 Express, 1998 Owner's manual

Chevrolet 1998 Express, 1998 Owner's manual
s
D
c
't - J
The 1998 Chevrolet Express Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains the air bag system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3- 1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road andhow to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells whatto do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to performvehicle maintenance and whatfluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects”on page 8- 10.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name EXPRESSare registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includesthe latest information at the time it
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without
further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,so it will be
there if you ever needit when you’re onthe road. If you
sell the vehicle, pleaseleave this manual in itso the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C9814 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux proprietaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 MeyersideDr.
Mississauga, Ontario W T lB9
OCopyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings andSymbols
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it willhelp you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words worktogether to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a boxand the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you needis the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
IA
CAUTION:
I
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you whatthe hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
iii
You will also find acircle
with a slash throughit in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
In the notice area, we tell you
about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times,this damage would
not be coveredby your warranty,and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what
to doto help avoid
the damage.
When you readother manuals, you mightsee
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in thisbook you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something thatcould
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven :
x
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
COOLANT
TEMP
e
A
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
BRAKE
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
--
FOG LAMPS
$0
VENTILATING
FAN
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
FUSE
-%-
I
LIGHTER
(a)
a
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE W
,111,
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
COOLANT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
h
HORN
SPEAKER
FUEL
b
b
p3
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Passenger Van
c
Cargo Van
vi
Cab and Chassis
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bagsand safety belts.
1-2
1-11
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-25
1-26
1-26
1-34
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Rear Seat Passengers
1-37
1-39
1-41
1-46
1-58
1-61
1-61
1-62
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
take them out and put them back in. Italso tells you
about reclining front seatbacks.
Manual Front Seats
The bucket seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the lever at the
front of the seat.
To adjust the seat, pull the lever up to release the seat
bottom and slide the seat whereyou want it. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1
You can lose controlof the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
you
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
I
1-2
Power Seat (Option)
You can raise and lower the front and rearof the seat. To
raise the front of the seat, move the rightlever up. To
lower it, move the right leverdown. To raise the rearof
the seat, move the left lever up. To lower it, move the
left lever down.
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s or
passenger’s side, you can adjust it with this switch at the
front center cushion of the seat.
You can use these switches to move me seat to where
you want it. To raise the seat, move the center knob up.
To lower the seat, move the center knob down. To move
the seat forward, move the center knob toward the right.
To move the seat rearward, move the center knob toward
the left.
To adjust the seatback, lift the front of this lever, which
is located at the inner edge of the seatcushion.
Move the seatback with your body and release the lever
to lock the seatback where you want it. Lean forward
and pull up on the frontof the lever and theseatback
will go to an upright position.
I
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do
their jobwhen
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t its
dojob because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle isin
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat andwear your safety belt properly.
Rear Seats
Getting Into the Rear Seats
To make it easier for passengers to get into therear
seats, use the fastener strips on the headliner and safety
belt latch. These will keep the safety belts out of the way
while people get into the rear seats.
1-5
Removing the Rear Seat
1. Disconnect the quick release latch platesfor the lap
shoulder belts on thebench seat to be removed. To
do this, press the tipof a keyinto the release hole
of the safety belt buckle while pulling on
up the
safety belt.
1-6
2. Lift the carpedmat flap at the inboard side of the seat
base in the rear.
3. Locate the red handle on the inboard side of the seat
base and rotate it up.
5. Stow the locking pin on the rear of the seat base in
the hole that isprovided.
4. Once the red handle is rotated up, pull the handle to
remove the locking pin.
6. Repeat this procedure for the pin on the other
seat base.
7. Pull the seat rearward about two inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
8. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
9. Install the trim covers to the floor rails. These are
supplied in a cardboard box at delivery.
10. For the first rear seat,stow the safety belt latchby
attaching the fastener strip on the safety belt latch
to the trim just inside the side door.There is also a
fastener strip provided for stowing the safety belt
latch for a four-passenger benchseat, if equipped.
1-8
For the remaining rearseats, stow the safety belt
latch plate on the clip at the window trim.
2. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both seat
bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
Replacing the Rear Seat
A CAUTION:
3. Both locking pins that locked theseat into place
must be installed before operating the vehicle.
A seat thatisn’t locked into place properly can
move around in acollision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure tolock
the seat into place properly when installing
it.
1 A-CAUTION:
4. To install the locking pin at the rear of the seat base,
pull the carpet/mat flap back on the inboard side to
locate the hole in the rail for the pin.
-
A safety belt thatis twistedor not properly
attached won’t provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are not
twisted and are properly attached.
1. Remove the trim covers from the floor rails and store
for future use.
5. Remove the pin from its stowed position on the seat
base while holding the carpedmat flapback.
6. Insert the red handled locking pin into the seat
base, lifting theseat slightly to line up the pin with
the base.
is in the
7. Rotate the red handle down until it
retaining clip.
8. Replace the carpet/matflap to its original position.
9. Repeat this procedurefor the other seat base.
10. Connect the quick release latch plates for the
lap
shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into the
buckles attached at the outboard positions
of the
bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
Don’t let anyone ride where he
or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can beseriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not be if you are buckledup. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
A CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride aincargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
1-11
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says
to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never knowif you’ll be ina crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if
it will be a bad one.
1-12
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled upa person wouldn’t survive.
But mostcrashes are in between.In many of them,
people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk
away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In mostcrashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why SafetyBelts Work
I
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat
on wheels.
1-13
I
Get it up to speed. Thenstop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-14
The person keeps going until stoppedby something.
...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk &:
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A:
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident ifI’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But youcan unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle hasair bags, why should I have to
wear safetybelts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in thefuture. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Everyair bag
system ever offered for sale has required theuse of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up
to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number
of serious
injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 kmh).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual
called “Children.” Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want toknow which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s howto wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to seehow, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-17
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the beltas you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snugon
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to thestrong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely
If you slid under it, the belt
to slide under the lap belt.
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the
body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash.
1-18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move
the height adjuster to the desired position.You can move
the adjuster upjust by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjusterto where you wantit,
try to move it down withoutpushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.
1-19
@
what’s wrong with this?
I
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
@
What's wrong with this?
,A Cn ITION:
You can be seriously injured if your beltis
buckled in the wrong place like this.
In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into
the buckle
nearest you.
t
A:
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
@
What’s wrong with this?
n
I
You can beseriously injured if your beltgoes
over an armrest like
this. The beltwould be much
too high. In a crash,you can slide under thebelt.
The belt forcewould then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the
pelvic bones, and that could
Be sure the belt
cause serious or fatal injuries.
goes under the armrests.
~
A:
~~~~~
The belt is over an armrest.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
if you wear the
crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm. aIn
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strongas shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or
spleen.
I
A:
1
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
12.'
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn't have the full widthof the
If a belt is twisted,
belt to spread impact forces.
make it straightso it can work properly,or ask
your dealerto fix it.
-
A:
A -. d
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
I--
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door,be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wearsafety belts.
A pregnant woman shouldwear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t behurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as foranyone, the keyto making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-25
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt worksthe same
way as the driver’s safetybelt -- except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you willengage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
If it says AIRBAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel and AIR BAG on the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger’s seat, your vehicle has twoair
bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air bag for
the rightfront passenger.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle partof the steering
wheel but it doesn’t say AIR BAGon the instrument
panel in front of the rightfront passenger’s seat, your
vehicle has an air bag for thedriver only.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle partof the steering
wheel, but thereis no right front passenger seat, your
vehicle has an air bag for the driver only.
1-26
-
If it doesn’t say AIR BAG on the middle part of the
steering wheel, your vehicle doesn’t have air bags.
If your vehicle has an air bag for the driver, the air bag
is a “Next Generation’’ reduced-force frontal air bag. If
your vehicle has an air bagfor the right front passenger
and there’s alabel on the driver’s side window, then
your vehicle has a “Next Generation” reduced-force
frontal air bag for the right front passenger. If your
vehicle has an air bag for the right front passenger but it
doesn’t have a label, then the rightfront passenger’s air
bag isn’t reduced-force.
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing yoursafety belt even if
you have air bags. Wearing yoursafety belt
during a crashhelps reduce your chance
of hitting
things insidethe vehicle or being ejected from it.
Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. All air bags even reduced-force air
bags are designed to work with safety belts, but
don’t replace them.Air bags are designed to work
only in moderate tosevere crashes where the front
of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t
designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, sideor
low-speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained
occupants, reduced-forceair bags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have providedin the past..
Everyone in yourvehicle should wear asafety
belt properly whether or notthere’s an air bag
for thatperson.
--
--
--
--
1-27
CAUTION: (Continued)
Air bags inflate withgreat force, faster thanthe
blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto aninflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. This istrue
even with reduced-forcefrontal airbags. Safety
belts help’keepyou in position beforeand during
a crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even with
reduced-force air bags. The driver should sit as
far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for
adults, but not for young childrenand infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safetybelt systemnor its
air bag system is designed
for them. Young
children andinfants need the protectionthat a
child restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children”and
see the caution labels on the sunvisors the
and
right front passenger’s safety belt.
If your vehicle hasan air bag for the right front
passenger, please readthis:
r
A CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
an airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. This istrue even if your vehicle
has reduced-forcefrontal airbags. Air bags plus
CAUTION: (Continued)
I 1-28
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument panel,
which shows AIR BAG.
The system checks theair bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag System Works
c
....
Where are the air bags?
The driver's air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger's air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
1-29
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
or it
might force the object into
that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept
clear. Don’t
put anythingbetween an occupant and an air
bag, anddon’t attach or put anything
on the
steering wheel hub oron or near any other air
bag covering. And don’t hang anything from the
assist handleon the passenger’s sideof the
instrument panel.
is about 11 to 16 mph (18 to 26 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.If
your vehicle strikessomething that will move or deform,
such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether anair
bag should have inflated simply
because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straightinto a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
1-30
In an impact of sufficient severity, the
air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is ina crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator,air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and inthe instrument panel infront of the
right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the forceof
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
air bags would
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motionis not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then onlyin moderate to
severe frontalor near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may noteven realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, butnot
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
When anair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon asit is safe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll needsome new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be thereto help protect you in another crash.
A new system willinclude air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readinessof the system, when the sensors are
activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on yourair bag
system. Improper servicecan mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your
dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering
wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break the air bag
coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water up to thecarpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks thecarpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined.
If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, thedamage could make theair
bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to
replace the air bags as well as
the sensors and related
parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed
to water that soaks the carpet,you can avoid needless
repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately.
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow it, unless
the battery cables are first disconnected.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affecthow your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the systemto
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and theGM Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
key is
For up to10 minutes after the ignition
turned off and the batteryis disconnected,an air
bag canstill inflate during improperservice. You
can be injuredif you are close to anair bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part
of
the air bagsystem. Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work foryou is qualifiedto do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q:
If I add a push bumper or
a bicycle rackto the
front of my vehicle, will
it keep theair bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’sbasic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q:
Is there anythingI might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the
air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also,the air bag system may not
work properly if yourelocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have anyquestions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (Thephone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure”
in the Index.)
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s howto wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-34
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it goback all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pullup on the shoulder part.
1-35
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
h
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop ora crash.
1-36
To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides.
This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for small
adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort
guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.
There is oneguide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seats. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrownchild restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s howto install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of
the seatback.
1-37
2. Slide the guide underand past the belt. The elastic
cord mustbe under the belt.Then, place the guide
over thebelt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-38
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and lies
it flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
Center Passenger Position
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions’’
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
1-39
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has rear bench
seats, someone can sit in
the center positions.
To make the belt shorter, pull
its freeend as shown until
the beltis snug.
Buckle, positionand release it thesame way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap see ‘‘safety Belt
Extendef’ at the end of this section.
safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt
Make sure the release buttonon the buckleis positioned
longer, tilt the latch plate and pullit along thebelt.
so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-40
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law inevery state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must berestrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children andBabies (Except Cargo
Vans with Passenyr Air Bags)
A CAUTION:
-
I
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even if your vehicle has
reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for
adults, but not for young childrenand infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air
bag system is designed
for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle.
1-41
/\
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always
be
restrained ina child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether itis
the right type andsize for yourchild. A very
young child’s hip bones areso small that a
regular belt might not stay
low on thehips, as it
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be over the
would apply
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
force right on thechild’s abdomen, which could
So, be sure that
cause seriousor fatal injuries.
any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in achild or infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support for the
head and neck. This is necessary becausean infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
restraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces canbe
distributed across the strongestpart of the infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate infant restraint. This is
so important that many
hospitals today won’t release a newborn infantto its
the
parents unless there is an infant restraint available for
baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 124b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
~~
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby
will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-43
1
Smaller Children and Babies (Cargo Vans
with Passenger Air Bags)
r
Children who are up against, or very close to,any
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even if your vehicle has
reduced-force frontal airbags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor
adults, but not for young childrenand infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air
bag system is designed
for them. Young children
and infants needthe protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle.
1-44
A CL-.
ON:
A very young child’s hip bones
are so small that a
regular belt might not stay
low onthe hips, as it
will likely be over the
should. Instead, the belt
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on thechild’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatalinjuries. Smaller children
and babies should always be
restrained in a child
restraint. However, infants, who should be
restrained in a rear-facing childrestraint, cannot
ride safely in this vehicle. The
instructions for the
restraint will say whetherit is the right type and
size for your child. If a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your child, besure the
child is always properly
restrained while riding in
this vehicle.
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby
will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby
would be almost impossible
to hold.
--
1-45
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ridein
vehicles, they should have protection provided
by appropriate restraints.
@
What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and
size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
An infant car bed (A) is aspecial bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s aninfant restraint system
designed to restrainor position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe
center of the vehicle.
1-46
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they needin a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the
base stays secured in thevehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-47
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forwardin the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect
children who are from20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four yearsof age. Onetype, a convertible
restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-48
i
A booster seat (F,G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight years of age. It’s designed toimprove
the fit of the vehicle’ssafety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-49
When choosing a child restraint,be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but thechild also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will showyou how to dothat. Both theowner’s
manual and the child restraint
instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint(Except Cargo
Vans and Cab andChassis Models)
Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they
are restrained in the rearrather than the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat. If your vehicle has a front
passenger air bag, never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates,
even if your vehicle
has reduced-force frontal air
bags. This is
because the backof the rear-facingchild
restraint would be very close to the inflatingair
passenger’s
bag. If your vehicle has a right front
air bag, always secure rearfacing
a
child
restraint in a rearseat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before
you do, always
it
move the front passenger seat as far as
back
will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in
a rearseat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind thatan unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collisionor sudden stop and injure peoplein
the vehicle. Besure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Where toPut the Restraint (CargoVans
and Cab and Chassis Models)
Top Strap
The childrestraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If your vehicle has a passenger air bag,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here's why:
'A
I
CAUTIO€'
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the passenger's
air bag inflates, evenif your vehicle has
reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, alwaysmove the passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you
how to do it.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in
front of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about thetop strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
1-52
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulderbelt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
If
you’re usinga forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all theway. The safety belt
will move freely again andbe ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint ina Center
Seat Position
You'll be using the lap belt.Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1-54
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. Push and pull thechild restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5 . To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-55
If your vehicle hasa front passenger air bag,never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’swhy:
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger’s
air bag inflates,even if your vehicle has
reduced-force frontal airbags. This is because
the backof the rear-facing child restraint
would
be very close to the inflating air
bag. If your
vehicle is a passenger van, always secure a
rearfacing child restraint in a rear
seat.
If your vehicle is a cargo vanwith a right front
passenger air bag, do not use a rear-facing child
restraint in this
vehicle. If a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your
child, always move
far back asit will go.
the passenger seat as
1-56
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. If your vehicle hasa front passenger air bag, always
move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latchplate, and run thelap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s faceor
neck, put it behind thechild restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if youever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-57
Larger Children
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down Children who have outgrown child restraints should
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
I Push and pull the child restraint in different
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
directions to be sure it issecure.
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
I .
1-58
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1 A CAUTION:
I
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.aIn
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured.A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-59
@
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If
the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
1-60
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
Never do this.
be just foryou, and just forthe seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’tlet someone else use it, and use it
Here a childis sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind only for theseat it is made to fit. To wear it, justattach it
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in to the regular safety belt.
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The Checking Your Restraint Systems
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
fatal injuries.
anchorages are working properly.Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see
anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
doing its job,have it repaired.
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
Torn or frayed safety belts may notprotect you in a
pelvic bones in a crash.
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety beltwill fasten around you, you
should useit.
Also look for any opened or broken air bagcovers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not needregular maintenance.)
1-61
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve hada crash, do you need newbelts?
After a very minorcollision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would beif worn
during a more severe crash, then you need newbelts.
1-62
Ifbelts are cut or damaged,replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will needto have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts andrepairs
may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being usedat
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll needto replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag systemearlier
in this section.
fi
NOTES
1-63
fi
NOTES
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to doif you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-9
2- 15
2- 16
2- 17
2- 17
2-18
2-20
2-2 1
2-24
2-25
2-28
2-29
2-29
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Your Doors and How They Work
Theft
[email protected]
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
2-30
2-30
2-3 1
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-40
2-43
2-45
2-48
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-5 1
2-53
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
Windows
Horn
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn SignalMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Cigarette LightedAshtray
Sun Visors
Instrument Panel
Instrument Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
I
I
a CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition keyis dangerous for manyreasons. A child
or others could be badly injured or even
killed.
They could operate power windows
or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.
2-2
P
k,.
I:.
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle hasa number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have
a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside.You may even have to damage
your vehicle toget in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining a new one.
The bar-coded tag has a codeon it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how to make an extra key. Keep
this tag ina safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be
able to have a new one made easily using this tag.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry,
see “Keyless Entry System” later inthis section for
more information.
From the outside, use your key.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open thedoors and fall out. Whena door is
locked, the insidehandle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle ina
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors,and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
2-4
--
.
F
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the lever on
your door down.
To unlock the door, slide
the lever up.
Power Door Locks (Option)
Press the bottomside of the
power door lock switch to
lock the doors at once.
Child Security Locks
Child security locks are located on the passenger side
rear door, the side sliding door or the front portion of
the 60/40 side swing-out door.
CHILD
SECURITY
LOCK
Printed In U.S.A.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.
With this feature, you can
lock these doors so they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
Move the button down to
engage the security feature.
Move the button up to
return the door locks to
normal operation.
Rear Cargo Door
2-5
Move the button tothe
left to engage the
security feature. Move
the button to the right to
return the door locks to
normal operation.
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle hasthis option, you can lockand unlock
your doors from about3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
60/40
“4
$,
w
L
~
1
CHILD
SECURITY
LOCK
A
Side SlidingDoor
2-6
Move the buttonup to
engage the security
feature. Move the button
down to return the door
locks to normal operation.
Your keyless entry system operates ona radio frequency
subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with IndustryCanada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and ( 2 ) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not workor if you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to
work, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See the
instructions that follow.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or ogects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
0
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-7
. -
-
Operation
Battery Replacement
To unlock thedriver's door, press the UNLOCK
button.
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter shouldlast about two years.
If you press this button again within
five seconds, all the
doors will unlock. Press the
REAR 2X button twice to
unlock the rear door only. When
the UNLOCK or
REAR 2X buttonis pressed, the interior dome lamps
are
turned onfor 40 seconds or until the ignition switchis
activated. Press LOCK tolock all doors.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won't
work at the normal rangein any location. If you haveto
get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it's probably time to change the battery.
I
NOTICE:
1
Each remote keyless entry transmitter
is coded to
prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking your vehicle.
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
purchased through your dealer. Remember
to bring any
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
remaining transmitters with you when you
go to your
transmitter.
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must alsobe matched. Once your dealer has codedthe
Use one [email protected] CR2032 battery:
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery, positive side down.
Synchronization
Synchronization may be necessarydue to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has beensent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold theLOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on thetransmitter for at least five
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Your Doors and How'TheyWork
Front Doors
To open the door from the outside, pull the handle and
pull the door open.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward
you and push thedoor open.
I
60140 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60140 door from
the outside, pull up on the handle and pull the handle
toward you.
2-10
I
To open the “60” (front) portion of a 60/40 door
from the inside, pull the handle toward you and push
open the door.
To open the “40” (rear) portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull it towardyou.
To close the side doors, close the “40” (rear) door first.
Then close the “60” (front) door. Check to make sure
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull thecheck strap outward at the springhole
and then open the door. When you
close the door, the
check strap will automatically re-engage.
2-11
Sliding SideDoor (Option)
To open the sliding side door from outside, pull the
handle toward the rearof the vehicle. Then, slide the
door toward the rear of thevehicle to open.
2-12
To close the sliding side door from outside, use the
outside door handle to slide the door toward the front
of the vehicle.
When the door slides closed completely,it will be flush
with the sideof the body.
I
To open the sliding door from inside, rotate the handle
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide
the door toward the rear of the vehicleto open.
To close the sliding door from inside, grasp the inside
handle and slide thedoor toward the front of the vehicle
to a closed position.
Make sure the door iscompletely closed before driving
your vehicle.
2-13
I
Rear Doors
I.
To open the rear doors from the outside, open the
passenger side rear door first. Pull the handle toward
you to open the door.
1
I
To open the driver side rear door, pulllatch
the release
lever at the insideedge of the door.
Both rear doors can be opened past 90 degrees by
opening the doors past thefirst detent (90 degrees open),
then opening fully.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, close the passenger side rear door. Check to
make sure both doorsare completely closed.
2-14
I
!
A CA J T A N :
It can be dangerous to drive
with the rear doors
(CO) gas can
open because carbon monoxide
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If you must drive with the rear doors open ifor
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between body
the and the
rear doors:
Make sure allwindows are shut.
I’urn the fan on your heating orcooling
system to its highest speed
with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLEND or DEF.
Additionally, on vehicles withheatindair
conditioning systems, NORM A/C or
BI-LEVEL A/C can be used. That will
force outside air into your
vehicle. See
“Comfort Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outletson or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehiclehas a number of theft-deterrent
features, we knowthat nothing we put on it can make it
you can help.
impossible to steal. However, there are ways
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicleand open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding youto remove your key from
the ignition and take it withyou. Always do this. Your
steering wheel will be locked, andso will your ignition
and transmission. And rememberto lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot,close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuablesout of sight.
Put them in astorage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where
someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s bestto lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you haveto leave your ignition key? Whatif
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your front
storage compartment.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
[email protected]
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system.The system
is armed once the key is removedfrom the ignition.
Passlock enables fuelif the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used,
fuel is disabled.
2-16
During normal operation, the SECURITY light willgo
off after the engine is started.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying
to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from the
START position as soon as theengine starts.
If you are driving and the SECURITY light comes on,
you
will be ableto restart the engine if youturn the engineoff.
However, your Passlock system is not working properly
and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not
protected by Passlock at this time.You may also want to
check the fuse (see “Fusesand Circuit Breakers” in the
Index). See your dealer for service.
If the SECURITY lightcomes on while the engine is
running, a problem has been detected
and the system
may need service.See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call theGM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance’’ in the Index.
New Vehicle 44Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Your key lets you turn the ignition switchto five
different positions.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speedat 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
C
,------1---\D
--
-9
A
E
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things
like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. To get into
ACCESSORY, push in the keyand turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked,just as it was
before you inserted the key.
2-17
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission.It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will onlybe able to remove your key whenthe
ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off theengine but
the steering
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motionwhile the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Move your shift lever toPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in anyother position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
START (E): This starts your engine.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force itcould break thekey or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
2-1s
Don’t try to shift to
PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Holding yourkey in STARTfor longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause your battery to be
drained muchsooner. And theexcessive heat can
damage your startermotor.
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (orstarts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
Engine Cool-nt Heater (If Equipped)
I
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment and is
attached to the hose for the power steering reservoir.
I
In very cold weather, 0°F (- I 8OC) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll geteasier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimumof
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
2-20
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1IO-volt AC outlet.
1A
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord asit was beforeto keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
/DI 3121
1
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, and it features an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument cluster. This display
must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out ofthe PARK (P) position. This means
that if your key is in the OFF position, but not locked,
there will be a small current drain on your battery which
could discharge your battery over a periodof time. If
you have a need to leave your key in the ignition in the
OFF position for an extended period for any reason, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start yourengine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
2-21
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the
shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unlessyou have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
To be sure your
You or others could be injured.
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.If
you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in
PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has a
brake-transmission shift interlock. With the ignition in
the RUN position, you must fully
apply your regular
brakes before youcan shift from PARK (P).
2-22
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want.See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” later in this section.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting intoREVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift toREVERSE (R)only after
your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and
forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damagingyour transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, yourengine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
I A CAUTION:
Shifting out ofPARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N)while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shiftout of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfwaydown.
Going about 35 mph (55 k m h ) or more, push the
accelerator all the waydown.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transmission.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lowerfuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use
your brakes off andon. If you manually select
SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in
SECOND (2). You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the selector lever is put in FIRST(1 ), the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen
if you are stuckin very
deep sand or mud or are up against
solida
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there withonly the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in positionon
a hill.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your leftfoot.
I f the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
2-24
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, locatedjust above the
parking brake pedal, markedBRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.
is released,
If the ignition is on when the parking brake
the brake system warning light will
go off.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your
rear brakes tooverheat. You may have to replace
them, and you could also damage other parts
of
your vehicle. Always check to be sure your parking
brake is fully released before you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer”in the Index. That section shows
what to dofirst to keep the trailer from moving.
It can be dangerous to get ofout
your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can
move suddenly.You or others couldbe injured.
To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
r
0
0
Pull the lever toward you.
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition keyin your
hand, your vehicle isin PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
I A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your
vehicle withthe
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat andeven catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave yourvehicle with the
engine running unlessyou have to.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may needto have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to takesome of the
pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so
you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock
system. You have to fullyapplyyourregularbrakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission”in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
2-28
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but
still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), trythis:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2, Apply and hold the brake until
the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and thenshift to thedrive gear
you want.
5 . Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system
fixed as soon as you can.
1
Parking
er Things That Bu--I
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park
that
Over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaustcoming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the roador over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive itonly with allthe windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-29
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
A CAUTlON:
~
It’s better notto park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the airsystem control off
could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle
(see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling ina closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even
if the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One
is a garage. Exhaust with
place this can happen
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in placecan bea blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-30
--
It can be dangerbus to
get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis
running unlessyou have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
PARK (P).
move the shift lever to
Follow the propersteps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer”in
the Index.
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
If you have this feature, your locking rear
axle can give
you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or
gravel. It works likea standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Windows
Manual Windows
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition hasbeen turned to the RUN position.
Push the rear of the switch with the power window
To operate your manual windows, turn the handcrank
on each doorto raise or lower your side door windows.
symbol on it to lower the window.
Power Windows (Option)
Push the front of the switch with thepower window
symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to lower without holding
the switch. Press and hold theside of the windowswitch
marked AUTO for onesecond to activate the
express-down mode. The express-down mode can be
cancelled at any time by pressing theopposite side of
the switch. To open the window part way, lightlytap the
switch until the window is at
the desired position.
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors.
2-31
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Window
Side Swing-OutWindow
1
1
'
To open your side door swing-out windows, pull up on
the latch at the edge of the window and swing the
window out and push down the latch into the locked
open position.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it.
2-32
Your rear swing-out windows work the same way, but
the latch is at the bottom edge of the window.
A
CAUTAN:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
swing-out windowsor rear door(s) open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rear swing-out
windows or rear door(s) open iforelectrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the rear
swing-out windows or reardoor(s):
Make sure allwindows are shut.
CAUTION: (Continued)
I CAUTION: (Continued)
Thrn the fan on your heating
or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, BLEND or DEE
Additionally, on vehicles withheatingair
conditioning systems,NORM A/C or
BI-LEVEL A/C can beused. That will
force outside air into your
vehicle. See
“Comfort Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outlets onor under the
’.
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheelallows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left sideof the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Changer
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the
lever. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level.
then release the lever to lock thewheel in place.
2-34
0
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
0
WindshieldWipers
0
WindshieldWasher
0
Cruise Control(Option)
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move thelever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically.
H
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turnor
lane change.
LI
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when yourelease it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t goon at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs anda blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps fromlow beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel also will
be on.
2-35
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipersstart, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This canbe very useful inlight rain or
snow, Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
2-36
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to the
LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band
further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the band
to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your
blades do become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The
windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc. may cause wiper linkage
damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the
windshield before using your windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
At the top of the lever, there’sa paddle with the word
PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the paddle.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not workat speeds below about
25 mph (40km/h).
1
-
/:1 CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer
fluid canform ice onthe windshield, blocking
your vision.
Washer fluid will spray aslong as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for approximately two more wipe cycles and
then either stop or return to the preset speed.
When you apply yourbrakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
A
CAUTILN:
Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou
can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavytraf‘fic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes
in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
2-37
Setting CruiseControl
I
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might ahit
button
to.
and go into cruise when you don’t want You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switchoff until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
Take yourfoot off the
accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose yousetyour cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake.This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruisecontrol switch from ON to R/A
(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second.
You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle willkeep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold theswitch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the
end of the lever, thenrelease
the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
0 Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it
there until you get up to the speedyou want, and
then release theswitch, To increase your speedin
very small amounts, move the switch
to R/A for less
than half a second. Eachtime you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Controlon Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going upsteep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.If the
steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed todrop
more than 15 mph (24 km/h) below the set speed, your
cruise control will automatically disengage. When going
downhill, you may have to brakeor shift to a lower gear
to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out ofcruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off thecruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
0
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.
Exterior Lamps
one more detent will activate the interior dome light
circuit (with slightly higher effort).
The dome lights cannot be turned on by depressing the
dome light switch button located below the parking
lampheadlamp knob. This switch is a dome lamp off
switch and will only interruptinputs from the doorjamb
switches inhibiting interior lightoperation when
depressed. It will not inhibit thelight function from the
I/P dimmer switch.
The delayed entry feature will allow you to enter or exit
your vehicle with the lights stayingon for about
20 seconds, after the door is closed or ignition is cycled.
Rotate the knob to the rightto the parking lampsymbol
to turn on:
Your parking lampheadlamp switch is on the driver’s
side of your instrument panel.
Your instrument panel dimmer thumbwheel has two
detent positions.
When the thumbwheel is movedto full brilliance, and
then into the first detent position,the radio display and
PRNDL display willgo to the day mode (full intensity).
This is known as “parade” mode.The rest of the I/P
illumination will stay in the maximum dimming
state
(full brilliance dimming).Moving the thumbwheel up
2-40
0
Parking Lamps
0
SidemarkerLamps
0
Taillamps
0
License Plate Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Ashtray Lamp
Rotate the knob to the right again to the master lighting
symbol to turn on all the lamps listed above as well as
the headlamps.
Rotate the knob to the left to OFF to turn off your lamps
and lights.
Rotate the thumbwheel next to the switch knob up to
adjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumbwheel
up to the first notch to return the radio display and
gearshift indicator Vacuum Fluorescence (VF) display
to fullintensity when the headlamps or parking lamps
are on.
Rotate the thumbwheel up to the second notch to
activate the interior dome lamps.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling on the turn signalhigh beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Headlamps On Reminder
A tone willsound when your headlamps are turned on
and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. If
you need to use your headlamps when the ignition
switch is inOFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the tonecan
be turned off byturning the thumbwheel next to the
parking lampheadlamp switch all the waydown.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
D I U can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
2-41
The DRL system will make your headlamps come
on at
Center High-MountedStoplamp
a reduced brightness when:
0
The ignition is on,
0
The headlamp switch is off, and
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t beon.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to getdark, your DRL indicator light is
a reminder to turn y,ourheadlamp switch on. Theother
lamps that come on with your headlamps will also
come on.
When you turn off theheadlamp switch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
To idle your vehicle withthe engine on and the DRLoff,
set the parking brake. The DRL will stayoff until you
release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, youshould turn on the regular
headlamp system when you needit.
2-42
Your vehicle’s center high-mounted stoplamp islocated
above the rear doors at the centerof the vehicle.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as ina
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block or
damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.
If you towa trailer that isequipped with provisions for a
center high-mounted stoplamp, see your GM dealer for
instructions on how to make it operate withyour
vehicle’s electrical system.As with any electrical system
modification, have the work performedby a qualified
electrical service person.
3
Interior Lamps
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can alsoturn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumbwheel, located next to the headlamp knob, all
the way up to the second notch. In this position, the
dome lamps will remain on whether the doors areopen
or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the headlamp knob, to set the dome lamps to
automatically come on when the doors are open, or to
remain off.
To use the dome override feature, push the button into
the “in” position. With the buttonin this position, the
dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open. To
return the lamps to automatic operation, push the button
and return it to the “out” position. With the button in this
position, the dome lamps will come on when you open
the doors.
Reading Lamps (Option)
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
next
to the lamp to turn the lamp on.
Press the button again to turnthe lamp off.
2-43
Underhood Reel Lamp (Option)
If you have an underhoodreel lamp, it islocated on the
passenger side of the engine compartment. The lamp can
be switched on without unreeling thecord. Also, you
can use it as a flashlight.
To use the lampas a flashlight, pull down on the lever
located under the lamp, unlocking the
lamp and pull the
lamp out. The cord will unreel as you pull the lamp.
When you are done using the lamp, reel the cord back
into the housing by turning the handle.
Then, slide the lamp into the holder and pressthe lever
marked PUSH at the bottom of the holder to lock into
the slot.
2-44
Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you to restore mirror to original position.
Select the mirror you want
to move by rotating the
switch to the right to adjust
the passenger side mirror
and to the left to adjust the
driver side mirror. The
center position is neutral.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can befolded in to enter
narrow doorways.
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors (Option)
If you have electric mirrors, they can be adjusted to
point where you want from inside the vehicle.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirroris adjusted where
you want it.
2-45
Your electric outside
rearview mirrors can be
defiosted’by pressing the
switch nextto the heater
contsols. (See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index).
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s sidemirror may be convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see morefrom the
driver’s seat.
A CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
on your right. Check your
could hit a vehicle
inside mirroror glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-46
Camper-’l[r---Mirrors (If Equipped)
~
If your vehicle is equipped
with the camper-type
mirrors, they can be
adjusted so you can have
a clear view of objects
behind you.
1. To adjust the mirrors
when towing a trailer,
rotate the mirror by
pushing the mirror
head toward thefront
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the mirror
head, so that the
mirror surface
faces the rear of
the vehicle.
2-47
Storage Compartments
Cigarette LightedAshtray
The front ashtray is located in the instrument panel
extension, at thecenter of the instrument panel. Lift up
on the ashtray door to open it.
NOTICE:
If you store paper and other things that burn in
on fire by
your ashtrays, they could be set
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
Do
not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
Your front storage compartment is at thecenter of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor.To open the
compartment, press down on inside portion of the
handle and the compartmentwill open automatically.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
2-48
To use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, andlet
go. When it’s ready,it will pop backby itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while itis heating can make it overload.
damagingthelighterandtheheatingelement.
Just push the lighter all the
way in and letgo.
Whenit’sdone, it will pop backbyitself.
To remove the front ashtray, pull upon the tab with a
key or screw driver inserted in the tab, and lift the
ashtray out.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.You
can also swing them from side to side. Your visors have
elastic straps you can use to hold items such as maps.
VisorVanityMirror(Option)
Some visors have mirrors built in, with or without
lamps. Just lift the mirror cover on each visor to turnthe
lamps on, if you have them.
Lighted mirrors also have an intensity switch to make
the mirror lamps brighter or dimmer. Just slide the
switch to the top for brighter light and to the bottom for
dimmer light.
2-49
-
.strurnentPanel
A. Lamp Controls
B. Air Vents
C. Instrument Cluster
D. Comfort Controls System
2-50
E.
E
G.
H.
Audio System
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Cupholder
Ashtray
I. Cigarette Lighter
J. Convenience Tray
K. Horn
L. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Instrument Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive
safely and economically.
2-51
the new odometer can be setto the mileage totalof the
old odometer, then it must be. Butif it can’t, then it’s set
at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to
show the old mileagereading when the new odometer
was installed.
Speedometer
n
8
1,
i.:.
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour ( k d h ) . Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has beendriven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
You may wonder whathappens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary asto the procedure
that must be followed, so check with yourstate or
provincial vehicle registrationoffice. But generally, if
2-52
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell
you how far your vehicle
has been drivensince you
last set the trip odometer
to zero.
To reset the trip odometer,fully press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout.
The trip odometer can show either total miles or trip
miles by using the pushcontrol in the cluster.
Electronic Road-Speed Governor
(Gasoline Engines) (Option)
This optional system automatically controls vehicle top
speed. The system controller receives a signal from the
vehicle speed sensor and reduces power when the
vehicle speed reaches the maximum 65 mph (105 k d h )
governed speed.
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the
engine just to let youknow they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when theremay be or is aproblem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with yourvehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Pleasefollow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warninglights
and gages. They’re abig help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then it
will flash for about
55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is alreadybuckled, neither the tone
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensor, theair bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flashfor afew
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly.Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-54
The air bag readiness light should
flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’tcome on then, have itfixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, before starting the
engine, as a check to show
you it isworking.
After the engine starts, the light shouldgo out. If it stays
on or comes on while youare driving, you may have a
problem with your chargingsystem. It could indicate a
problem with the alternator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem.Have it checked right away.
Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it
helps to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Voltmeter
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
1
W
VOLTS
I
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warningzones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone mayoccur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle andthe engineis left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higherengine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for ashort time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
2-55
anada
Brake
System
Warning
Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you setyour parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
This iiiht should
come
briefly
on when
you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop Carefully. YOU may notice that the Pedalis
harder to push. Or, the pedal maygo closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
States
United
2-56
I
-
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
~
-
-:
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into
the red area your engine is
too hot!
ANTI LOCK
United States
Engine Coolant Temperature(I
Canada
With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on
when you start your engine andmay stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle, and turn off the ‘engineas soon as possible.
The “Problems on the Road”section of this
manual shows what to do. See“Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-57
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine)
8
I
NOTICE:
1 Your vehicle is equipped
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls
may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could leadto costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, as a check to show youit is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’tcome on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction inone
of two ways:
0
0
2-58
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. GM or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady-- An emission controlsystem
malfunction has been detectedon your vehicle. GM
or qualified service center diagnosis and service may
be required.
If the LightIs Flashing
If the LightIs On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoidinghardaccelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A looseor
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
b
I
malfunction by considering the following:
If the light continues to flash, when it issafe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, waitat least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
Did youjust drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet.The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuelshould correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel capproperly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
2-59
Have you recently changedbrands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality
fuel (see
“Fuel” in theIndex). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stallingafter start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear,misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected bythe system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use.It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have madethe light turn off,
have your dealeror qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the propertest equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may havedeveloped.
2-60
Oil Pressure Gage
8o
OIL
W
I
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the
engine is running. Canadian
vehicles indicate pressure
in kPa (kilopascals).
h
Oil pressure may vary withengine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zoneindicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressurezone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
A CAUTION:
Security Light
I
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure islow. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oilas soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
SECURITY
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to START.
m
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the Passlock%ystem has entered a tampel
mode. If the vehiclefails to start, see “Passlock” in
the Index.
I-
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems canbe costlyand is not covered by
your warranty.
If the lightcomes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your GM dealer.
2-61
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
Check Gages Light
You may have this lighton
the instrument panel.It will
light whenever theDRL are
on. It is also a reminder to
turn on your headlamps
when driving at night.
CHECK
GAGES
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and
engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
2-62
1 Gage
Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:
.~
\\'
The fuel gage, when the
ignition is on, tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in yourtank.
E
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you
are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was halffull, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank's capacityto fill
the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn't go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off theignition.
None of these indicate a problem with thefuel gage.
2-63
b%
2-64
NOTES
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read aboutthe particular systems supplied with yourvehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
Comfort Controls
Heater Controls
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
Rear Heater (Without Air Conditioning)
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation Tips
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
3-9
3-11
3- 16
3-20
3-2 1
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
Remote Compact Disc Player (IfEquipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Power Antenna Mast Care
Comfort Controls
Fan Knob
This section tells you howto make your air system
work for you.Your comfort control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
The knob on the leftside of the heating systemcontrol
panel controls thefan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it towardLO. To turn the
fan off, move the mode knob on the
far right to OFF.
With these systems, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in yourvan. Your vehicle also
has a flow-through ventilation system described later
in this section.
Heater Controls
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets
you select the
relative temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger area
of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjustthe
relative air temperature independentlyof the function knob
setting. Move the knob toward the red area for warmer air.
air.
Move the knob toward the blue area for cooler
Mode Knob
The right knob changes the heater setting.
+.
+.
/J VENT This setting directs air through the
instrument -panel vents.
+fl
BI-LEVEL: Use this setting to divide airflow
between the heater floor vents and instrument panel vents.
If your vehicle does not haveair conditioning, your
heater controls will look likethis.
3-2
e
+
HEAT This
’
setting directs air through the heater
floor vents. This setting is useful for cold weather.
w. HEAT/DEFROST
+
’ Use this setting to divide
airflow between the heaterfloor vents and windshield.
DEFROST This setting directs air through the
windshield defroster vents. This setting is useful when
you have fog or iceon the windshield.
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move theknob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it towardLO. To turn the
fan off, move the mode knobon the far right to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow youto adjust
the relative air temperature independently of the
function knob setting. Move the knob toward the red
area forwarmer air. Move theknob toward the blue area
for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel changes the
heatedair conditioning setting.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heatedair
conditioning controls will look like this.
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air.
MAX A/C: Move the rightknob to MAX A/C for
maximum cooling. This setting puts the system in the
recirculation mode and helpsto maximize your air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest. After
the vehicle’s interiorreaches a comfortable temperature,
move the knob to the right to place the airconditioning
system in the A/C mode.
3-3
A/C: Use for normal cooling on hot days. This setting
cools outside air and directs it through the instrument
panel outlets.
+e
+',
BI-LEVEL A/C: Use this setting to divide aifflow
between the heaterfloor vents and instrument panel
vents. The air conditioning compressor may operate in
this setting to cool the air.
-e
VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel vents.
0
+HHEAT This setting directs air through the heater
floor vents. This setting is useful for cold weather.
G?
HEAT/DEFROST: Use this setting to divide
aifflow between the heaterfloor vents and windshield.
DEFROST: This setting directs air through the
windshield defroster vents.This setting is useful when
you have fog or ice on the windshield.
Rear Heater (Without Air Conditioning)
If you have a rear heater (without rear air conditioning),
the control switch is located onthe instrument panel.
3-4
To increase and decrease the flowof heated air to the
rear floor vents, move the switch marked REAR
HEAT
to the blower speedyou want.
The knob has three speedpositions. To increase the flow
of heated air, move the switch toward HIGH.To turn the
fan off, move the switch toOFF.
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
vent airflow or to the right for headlinervent air flow.
Generally, the upper ventsare used for air conditioning
If your vehicle has a rear air conditioning and rear heater and the floor vents for heating.The control knob can be
system combination, controlsare provided to regulate the
set to any blend setting.
temperature, location and speedof the airflow.
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan control knobon
the left side
of the control panel to the desired blower setting.
To activate the rear control, move the fan knob on
the
front control to REAR CNTL.
Front Passenger Control
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the right side of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn theknob toward the red area, and
for cooler air, turn theknob toward the blue area.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the center knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob to the left for floor
Rear Passenger Control
The rear control worksjust like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengersto adjust the controls as
they desire.
Air Conditioning
1
Before using your vehicle’sair conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air.This reduces the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep
your windows closed for the air conditioner to work at
its best.
On cold days, use HEATER with the temperature knob
in the red area. Outside air will be brought in through
the floor outlets. The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while usingit.
You can use MAX A/C with the temperature knobin the
blue area when it’s really hot
outside and you needto
cool the inside air quickly. MAX A/C lets in only alittle
air from the outside.
If you first use MAX A/C, you can then use A/C with
the temperature knob in theblue area, as soon as the
vehicle has cooleddown, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.
~
ting
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting yourengine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater”in the Index.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or
any other obstruction (such as leaves).The heater
and defroster will workfar better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
If your vehicle hasrear air conditioning, setting it on LO
may enhance front A/C performance by allowing
trapped refrigerant inrear lines to circulate.
When the air conditioning, DEFROST or BLEND is on,
you may noticea slight increase or decrease in engine
speed, due to compressor operation. This is normal
because the system is designedto cycle the compressor
on andoff to keep the desired temperature.
~
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects.
This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air vents in the center and
on the sides
of your instrument panel.
3-6
You can move the ventsfrom side to side orup and
down to direct the flow of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the
flow of air coming out of any vents that are open.
ignition off, press RECALLor H R M N and the time
will be displayedfor a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your Delco Electronics audio system has beendesigned
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can doand how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press andhold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Setting theClock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the systemon and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn itto the left to
decrease volume.
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press andhold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To displaythe clock with the
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When theradio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
3-7
-.
1
1
i
1
I
i
1
1
Finding a Station
In addition to the four stations alreadyset, up to three
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM
and F M . The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
more stations may be preset on each
band by pressing
two adjoining buttons atthe same time. Just:
SEEK: Press the rightarrow to tuneto the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear onthe display.)
2. Press AM-F'M to select the band.
3. Tune in the desiredstation.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn thecontrol behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balancesthe sound betweenthe speakers.
1. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press two adjoining buttons atthe same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station youset will return.
SCAN: Press bothSEEK buttons to listen atofew seconds
of each radio station.
SCAN will light up on the display. Press
4. Repeat the stepsfor each pair of pushbuttons.
the right arrow to tune
in the next higher station and press the
Setting theTone
left arrow to tune to the next lower station. VOLUME
Press
or both SEEK buttons to stop scanning.
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttonslet
you returnto your favorite stations. You can set up to
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).Just:
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may
want to decrease thetreble.
1. Turn the radio on.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station youset will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-8
FADE: Turn the control behindthe lower knob to move
the sound to thefront or rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FMl and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on andoff and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right.Turn it to the left to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons
let you returnto your favorite stations. You can set
up to 2 1 stations (seven AM, seven FM 1 and
seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the fourpushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-9
I
In addition to the four stations already set, upto three
more stations may be preseton each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at thesame time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the stationyou set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and playeach preset station storedon your pushbuttons
for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations.
3-10
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this leverup or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle
position balances thesound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn thecontrol behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances thesound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes thatare
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
this player.
that are so thin they may not work well in
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette
tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing
the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK leftarrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
Playing the Radio
EJECT Press this buttonto remove the tape or stop the
tape and play the radio.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you shouldclean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapesand player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECTfor fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left todecrease volume. The knob is capable of
being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time withthe ignition off by
pressing this button. When theradio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-11
SCV: Your system hasa feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume(SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make upfor road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume atthe
desired level. Move thecontrol ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always soundthe same to you as you drive.
If you don't want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on thecontrol ring allows for
more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show yourselection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Pushthe knob back into its stored
position when you're not usingit.
SEEK: Press the rightarrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the
next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-12
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station
until you press the button again.The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button,the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FMl orFM2 mode and then pressP.
SCAN. It will scan througheach station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all ofthe pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light upon the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (PI-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knobto the right to increase bass
and to the leftto decrease bass. When the BASS control is
rotated, the AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press lightly onthis knob to release it from its
stored position. Turnthe knob to the right toincrease
treble and to the left to decrease treble. When the TREB
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. If a station is weakor noisy, you may wantto
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this buttonto select among the
to the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
of the preset
button, the selection will switch to one
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(CountryNestern) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
TONE
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment
to
the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS or TREB
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
Use PUSHBUTTONS to program AUTO TONE.
Adjusting theSpeakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
stored position. Turn the controlto the right to adjust
sound to the right speakers and to the leftto adjust
sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn thecontrol to the right to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and to the left for the rear
speakers. The middle position balances thesound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignitionoff, press EJECT
or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition
is on but the radio isoff, the tape will begin playing.
VOL, AUTO TONE,
Once the tape is playing, use the
BAL, FADE, BASS and TFEB controls just asyou do for
the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be
on the display whenever a tapeis being played. Anytime a
tape is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, thedouble-D symbol will appear
on the display.
PREV (1): Press the PREV buttonor the SEEK left
arrow to searchfor the previous selection.A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player tostop
at thebeginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during theSEEK operation.
3-14
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to searchfor the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.The sound
will mute while searchingfor the next selection.
REV (4): Press this buttonto rapidly reverse the tapeto
the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again, The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
00 (5): Press this buttonto reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol willappear on the display while
the player isin this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you pressFWD again.
The radio will play thelast selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow willblink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape
to the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this buttonto return to the tape
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit withyour cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
3. Press and hold the TAPEAUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will now play.EJECT can beused with either the
ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
4. Insert the adapter while the tape symbol is flashing.
It will power up theradio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in theIndex. After you clean
the player, press and holdEJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-15
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
SCV: Your systemhas a feature called
SPeed-ComPensated-Volume ( s c v ) . With s c v , Your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume,as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.The volume
level should always sound thesame to you as you drive.
If you don't want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notchon the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display willshow your selection.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
Off. TO increase volume, turn this knob to the right. Turn choose
radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
position when you're not using it.
rotating continuously.
SEEK: Press the right arrowto tune to the next
RECALL: Display the time withthe ignition off by
higher station andthe left m o w to tune to the next
pressing this button. When theradio is playing, press
lower station and stay there.The sound will mute
this button to recall the station frequency.
while seeking.
Playing the Radio
3-16
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the toneyou selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on
your pushbuttons and stopfor a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen toa specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (Pl-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next presetstation.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob to the right to increase bass
and to the left to decrease bass. When the BASS control is
rotated, the AUTO TONE displaywill go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on thisknob to release it from its
stored position. Turn theknob to the rightto increase
treble and to the left to decrease treble. When the TREB
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-17
AUTO TONE: Press this buttonto select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound
to
the music or voice being heard.Each time you press the
button, the selection will switchto one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK,POP, C N
(CountryWestern) orJAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank.This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated,the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on thisknob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control to the right
to adjust
sound to the right speakers andto the left to adjust
sound to the left speakers.The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly onthis knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn thecontrol to the right to adjust the
sound to the front speakers andto the left for the rear
speakers. The middle positionbalances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-18
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please
note that you can also turn the system on when you insert
a compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The
player will pullit in. Wait afew seconds and thedisc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytimeyou are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appearson the
display, it could be that:
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the roadgets smoother.)
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will
advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDMmode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this buttonor
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear thedisc selection play at
high speed while you press the REVbutton. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the discselection play at
high speed while you press theFWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the wordCD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays inthe player and willresume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, pressCD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If theradio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing atthe point where
it stopped.)
EJECT Press this buttonto eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. Whenthe same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull theCD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition isoff,
press this button to load a CD.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. The track
number will also appear when a new track begins to
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
3-19
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. Whena
disc isplaying, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If you h.ave this option, you can pla.y one compact disc
(cD)at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be
pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition
is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and
begin playing the CD. It ispossible to load and unload
CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will bepulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
3-20
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, itcould be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this buttonto go back to the start of the
current trackif more than eight seconds have played.
Press PREV again to go to the previous trackon the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enterthe random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the previous or next track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
[email protected] is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed. Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK if
THEFTLOCK is displayed on the front of the radio.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be usedor
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
3-21
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, theradio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over atStep 4.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will showREP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that yourradio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turnedoff.
1. Write down any threeor four-digit number from
000 to 1999 andkeep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
Unlocki the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will
use the
secret code number which you have written down.
~
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digitsagree
with your code.
6 . Press MN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
with yourcode.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the firstone or two digits agree
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
with your code.
3-22
If you enter thewrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose orforget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows;pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignitionto ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5 . Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one ortwo digits agree
with your code.
7 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed and later applied to a
secured radio, theradio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the trebleto reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles ( 16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable
until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal canbe loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautionsby
adjusting the volume controlon your radio toa safe
to it.
sound level before your hearing adapts
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
3-24
I
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tapeplayer, CB radio, mobile
telephone ortwo-way radio be sureyou can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do properly.
it
Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operationof
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radioor
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check
with
your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone
units.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should bestored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tapeplayer for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean thetape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub
the tape head as the hubs
of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for fiveseconds.
The tape symbol on the display willflash for two
seconds, showing that the cut tape detection feature
is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
3-25
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPEAUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette while
the tape symbol isflashing.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing actioncleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to resetthe CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear andthe sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the
cassette
you have yourtape
tape is in good condition before
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their originalcases
or other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc issoiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wipingfrom the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch thesignal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping theouter edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Power Antenna Mast Care
Your power antenna will look its best and work
well if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the
antenna mast:
1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
I
NOTICE:
I Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication
could damageit.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.
3. Wipe the cloth overthe mast sections, removing
NOTICE:
any dirt.
4. Wipe dry with aclean cloth.
5 . Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio orignition off and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.
Before entering an automatic car
wash, turn off
go down.
your radio to make the power antenna
This will prevent the mast frompossibly getting
damaged. If the antenna does notgo down when
you turn the radiooff, it maybe damaged or
need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the
antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit
and follow the instructions in the kit.
3-27
b
3-28
NOTES
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’vealso
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-5
4-6
4-8
4-11
4-1 1
4- 12
4- 14
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 15
4- 18
4- 19
4-20
4-2 1
4-2 1
4-23
4-27
4-28
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving reallymeans “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might
do. Be readyfor their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventableof
accidents. Yet they are common.Allow enough
following distance. It’s thebest defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and ruraldriving. You never
know when the vehiclein front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a veryimportant safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” inthe Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading,or reaching for somethingon the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask
a passenger to help do things like this, or off
pullthe road
in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s thenumber one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How muchis “too much’ if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
@
Judgment
The amount of alcohol consumed
Muscular Coordination
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths arethe result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. Forpersons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, ginor vodka.
4-3
man of her same body weight when eachhas the same
number ofdrinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number ofU.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after threeto
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is inthe drinks, and how
quickly the person drinksthem.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if
the same person drank threedouble martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would beclose to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food justbefore or during drinking will have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
Since alcohol is carriedin body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach higher
a
BAC level than a
But the abilityto drive is affected well below a BAC
of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effectsare worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BACof
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC levelof 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hourto rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful’’ isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Drinking and then driving
is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment canbe affected byeven a small amoun
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’tdrink and drive or ride with a drive
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab;
or if
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
you’re witha group, designatea driver who will
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
not drink.
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
--
--
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception timeand
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might beless with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But evenin 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 k d h ) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lotof distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavementor
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may nothave time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking.
If you keep pace withthe
traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops whileyou’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But
you will use it when youbrake. Once the power assistis
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This isnormal.
ANTI LOCK
United States
Canada
If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stayon. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road
is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens withABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster Remember: Anti-lock doesn’tchange the time you need
to get yourfoot up to the brake pedalor always decrease
than any driver could. The computer is programmed
to
stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehicle in
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
front of you, you won’t have time
to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Alwaysleave
enough room up aheadto stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock workfor you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering
can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
You can steer around theobstacle while braking hard.
Power Steering
As you brake, your computerkeeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine
stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Speed Sensitive Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with a speed sensitive steering
system. This system automatically varies the amount of
steering effort in proportionto your vehicle speed. The
required steering effort increases as your speed increases.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve dependson the
condition of your tires andthe road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meetthe road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you wantit
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of thecurve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steeringcan be more effective than
brakmg. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front
of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking-- if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for
evasive action-- steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.(See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it afull 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided theobject.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safetybelts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
OFF- ROAD RECOVERY
/
A - * gNot necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
worst of all trafficaccidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traflic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right
to pass
(providing the road aheadis clear). Never cross a solid
line on your sideof the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-11
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t
get too close. Timeyour move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that morethan makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down anddrop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
0
of the right lane to pass. When youare far enough
ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your rightlane change signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it reallyis.)
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaitingan opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of
vision, especially ifyou’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep backa
reasonable distance.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But takecare that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glanceover your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
4-12
0
Try not to pass more thanone vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
a Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle
too rapidly.
Even though the brake lampsare not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
0 If you’re being passed, make
it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what drivingexperts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t haveenough friction where the
tires meet the roadto do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep tryingto steer and
constantly seek an escape route or areaof less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down andadjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow downon slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reducea rraction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause thetires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have anydoubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Driving at Nieht
e Don’t drink and drive.
e Adjust your inside rearview mirror
to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
a Since you can’t see as well, you may needto
slow down andkeep more space between youand
other vehicles.
e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your
headlamps can lightup only so much road ahead.
e In remote areas, watch for animals.
a If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as
we get olderthese differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice
as much light to see the
same thing at nightas a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is thatsome drivers are likelyto be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs,with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drivedefensively.
4-14
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjustingto night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglassesat night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also makea lot
of things invisible.
You can betemporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn't lower thehigh beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving
in
E
1
Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glasson your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirtyglass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it's easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren't even aware of it.
4-15
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can't stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn't as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don't have much treadleft, you'll get
even less traction. It's always wise to goslower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are
tuned for driving on drypavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harderto see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tankfilled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-16
Driving too fast through largewater puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Tryto avoid puddles.
But if you can't, try to slow down before youhit them.
A CAUTION:
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a carwash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water cancome in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that slightly
is
of your vehicle. If you
lower than the underbody
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive
through them veryslowly.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It canhappen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or othervehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your viewrestricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-17
Citv Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll wantto watch out for
what the other driversare doing and pay attentionto
traffic signals.
Here are waysto increase your safetyin city driving:
4-18
0
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get
a city map and plan your
trip into an unknown part of
the city just as you would for a cross-country
hip.
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is
there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a lightturns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersectionor may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try todetermine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into thegap atclose to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway,adjust your speed to the
posted limit or tothe prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with trafficand keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you wantto leave the freeway, moveto the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
4-19
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check beforea trip:
Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going
slower than you actually are.
Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they ingood shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, OtherFluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drivein.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’llbe ready
and willing to helpif you need it.
4-20
Lamps: Are they all working? Arethe lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along yourroute? Should you delay your tripa short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
of the tires on the road,
same scenery, along with the hum
the droneof the engine, and the rushof the wind against
the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road less
in
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you get sleepy, pull offthe road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-21
1
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
.) Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
0
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
If you don’t shift down, your brakescould get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakeson a steep downhill slope.
1
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
0
Know how to go uphill.You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’tswing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
0
As you go over the top ofa hill, be alert. There could
be
something in your lane,like a stalled car or an accident.
0
You may see highway signson mountains that warn of
special problems. Examplesare long grades, passingor
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brushor broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bagsto help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will needto be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
0
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-23
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the
fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping soonerthan you would ondry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
What’s the worsttime for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard todrive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because may
it offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; O O C ) and freezing rain begins tofall.
Try to avoiddriving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-24
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear.If
you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brakewhile you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle toalert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-25
’A
CAUTION:
Snow cantrap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
CO (carbon monoxide) gas
This can cause deadly
to get inside.CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it,so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the baseof your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time tosure
be snow
doesn’t collect there.
of the
Open a window just a little on the side
vehicle that’s away from
the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
4-26
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a
well-charged battery (or batteries)to restart the vehicle,
and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps.
Let the heater runfor a while.
If you have a diesel engine,you may have to run it at a
higher speed to get enough heat.
Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almostall the way to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as longas you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half houror
so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certificatioflire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWRfor your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
I
The Certificationrnire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver's door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo.
A
QUI 0 :
I Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break,
or it can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control.Also,
overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.
4-27
Towing a Trailer
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stop
or turn, or
in a crash.
0 Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
so that some of them are
inside the vehicle
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-28
-\,
CAUTION:
If you don’t usethe correct equipmentand drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull
a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pulla trailer only if you have followed
all the stepsin this section. Ask your dealer
for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
I NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weightof the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety andthat of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pulla trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will belegal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be stateor provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg). You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wearin at the
heavier loads.
4-29
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a
lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will
life of your
minimize heat buildup and extend the
transmission.
Three important considerations haveto do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
Model
Engine
Axle
GlOOOO 4.3L
5.OL
5.7L
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used
to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any
special equipment thatyou have on your vehicle.
The following chart showshow much your trailercan
weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
G20000 4.3L
5 .OL
5.7L
G30000
5.7L
6.5L
7.4L
4-30
Ratio
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.42
3.73
3.42
4.10
3.42
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
Max. Trailer Weight
(kg)
(lbs.)
4000
(1 816)
4500
(2043)
5000
(2270)
5500
(2497)
6500
(295 1)
4000
(1816)
4000
(1816)
5000
(2270)
5500
(2497)
5500
(2497)
7000
(3 178)
5500
(2497)
7000
(3 178)
6000
(2724)
7500
(3405)
6500
(2951)
8000
(3632)
10,000
(4540)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the towing vehicle andit
has all the required traileringequipment. The weight of
additional equipment, passengers and cargo in the
towing vehicle must be subtractedfrom the above
maximum trailer weights.
You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listedin your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of anytrailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
If you’re using your platformhitch as a weight-carrying
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight(B). If you’re using your
platform hitch as a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loadedyour trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
1
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
0
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s dooror
see “Tire Loading”in the Index. Then be sure you don’t
go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, whenloaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very importantfor proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’redriving.
0
Will you have to make any holesin the body of your
vehicle whenyou install a trailer hitch?
witches
1
It’s important to have the
correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a
few reasons why you’ll need
the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach
to the
bumper. Do not use a ball hitch, because it could pull
the bumper loose.
If you’re usingthe wiring providedby the
factory-installed hitch, you should not need
to make
any holes inthe body of your vehicle. However, if
you have an aftermarkethitch installed, you may
need to make holesin the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaustcan get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and watercan, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Crossthe safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be providedby the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Followthe
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Driving with a Trailer
I
If you have arearmost window openand you
pull a trailer with yourvehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) couldcome into your vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessor
death. (See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
0 Have your exhaust system inspected
for
leaks, and make necessaryrepairs before
starting on yourtrip.
0 Keep therearmost windows closed.
0 If exhaust doescome into your vehicle
through awindow in the rear oranother
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system onand with the
fan on any speed. This will
bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculatesthe
air inside yourvehicle. (See “Comfort
Controls’’ in the Index.)
4-33
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll wantto get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of
handling and braking withthe added weight of the
you are
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safetychains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to besure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip,check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and thatthe lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice asfar behind the vehicle aheadas you
would whendriving your vehicle withouta trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passingdistance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good deal
longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than they would get hot and no longer work well.
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
speed to around 45 mph (70 k d h ) to reduce the
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
lhrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer,your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signalflasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature thanat normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similarto
engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked (preferablyon level ground) with the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes beforetumine
the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see
“Engine Overheating”in the Index.
4-35
Parking on Hills
You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, yourrig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
But if you ever have to park your rigon a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regularbrakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheelsinto the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.
3. When the wheelchocks are in place, release the
regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regularbrakes. Then apply your parking
brake and then shiftto PARK (P).
5 . Release the regularbrakes.
Shift into a gear; and
0
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly untilthe trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will needservice more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things that are especially important intrailer
operation are automatic transmissionfluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Eachof these is covered inthis
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start yourtrip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-36
Trailer Wiring Harness
0
Light Green: Back-up lamps
The light-duty trailer wiring harness is a six-wire
harness assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer
wiring package is an eight-wire harness assembly. The
harness is stored under the vehicle, along the driver’s
side rear corner of the frame rail. The heavy-duty trailer
wiring harness has a 30-amp feed wire. Both harnesses
come without connectors and should be wired by a
qualified electrical technician. The technician can use
the following color code chart when connecting the
wiring harness to your trailer.
0
Brown: Parking lamps
Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes (eight-wire
harness only)
Orange: Trailer accessory (eight-wire harness only)
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
0
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal
0
White (heavy gage): Ground wire
White (light gage): Center high-mounted stoplamp
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tapeor
strap it to your vehicle’s framerail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bendor break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground.Store the
harness in its original place. Wrap theharness together
and tie it neatlyso it won’t be damaged.
$&INOTES
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-1 1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)
5- 14
5-21
5-2 1
5-22
5-36
Cooling System (Gasoline Engines)
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Push the buttonat the top of
the steering column all the
way downto make your
front and rear turn signals
flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even
if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, pushthe button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and
rear turn signal lamps willflash on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warningflashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles,you can use themto
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has rundown, you may wantto use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please follow the steps below to do it safely.
A CAUTION:
Batteries canhurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acidthat can burn you.
They contain gasthat can explode or ignite.
They confain enough electricityto burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things canhurt you.
~~
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result
in costly damage
to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Rying to start your vehicleby pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and itcould damage your vehicle.
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries
(or more) you should knowbefore you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be
able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your dieselengine.
If your vehicle has more than one battery, use the
battery that is under the hoodof the vehicle - this
will reduce theelectrical resistance.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but besure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. U they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmlyon both vehicles involvedin
the jump start procedure. Put your automatic
transmission in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turnoff all
lamps that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries, and
could save
your radio.
5-4
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
by
damaged. The repairs would not be covered
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.
’A
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start
up even when the engine
is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands,
from any underhood
clothing and tools away
electric fan.
A CAUTION:
Using a match neara battery can cause battery
gas toexplode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlightif
you need morelight.
Be sure the batteries have enough
water. You
don’t need to add water to the
ACDelco
[email protected] battery (or batteries) installed in
every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If
it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If
you don’t, explosive gascould be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you.
Don’t get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with
water andget medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go toan unpainted
metal engine part or a body metal surface. Don’t
connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe other
parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (-) to
negative (-).
Fans orot---r n-- ving engine parts can
in, ..re you
badly. Keep your hands away from
moving parts
once the engineis running.
5-5
7. Don't let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle hasone.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
Or use
a remote positive(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-6
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to the
good battery's
negative (-) terminal.
Don't let theother end
touch anything until the
next step.
9. Make your last connection away from the battery, to
the engine block, frame or other unpainted metal
parts of your vehicle. A ground location has been
provided through a stud attached to the body surface.
10. Remove the cap on the ground location before using.
1 1. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Takecare that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have your GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. Theycan provide the right
equipment and know-how to tow it without damage. See
“Roadside Assistance”in your Index.
If your vehicle has beenchanged since it was
factory-new, by adding thingslike fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these thingscould
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
A. Engine Block, Frame, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
or Body Surface
B . Good Battery
C . Dead Battery
0
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive.
0
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for
the transmission.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
A CAUTWN:
To help avoid injury to
you or others:
Never let passengers ride ina vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted
speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the
tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towinga vehicle.
I
A vehicle can fall from a car carrier
if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can causea collision,
serious personal injury and
vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing,etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath thetowed vehicle.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a
straight ahead position, with a clamping device designed
for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering
column lock for this. The transmission should be
in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake should
be released.
5-9
Front Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towing from the front.
Tow Limits - 35 mph (56kwr/h), 50 miles (80 km)
I
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the
front bumper systemwill be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping maybe required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage avehicle or wheel-lift equipment.
To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly
and raise thevehicle until adequate clearance
is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Rear Towing
I
NOTICE:
Do not tow with the sling-type equipmentor the
rear bumperwill be damaged. Use wheel lift or
car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may
be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use safety
chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. To help avoid damage, install
a towing dollyand raise thevehicle until
adequate clearanceis obtained between the
ground and/orwheel-lift equipment.
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)
I NOTICE:
Do not tow the vehicle from the rearwith loads
approaching rated GVW as the weight transfer w
li
cause the frontsuspension to become overloaded.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel.If you have a diesel engine, you willalso
find a low coolant light on your instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
5-11
1
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can you
burn
badly, evenif you just open thehood. Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steam
coming
from it. Just turnit off and get everyone away
from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until
you
there is no sign of steam or coolant before
open the hood.
If you keep drivingwhen your engineis
overheated, the liquids in
it can catchfire. You or
others couldbe badly burned. Stop your engine
if
it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the
engine iscool.
NOTICE:
~
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant,your vehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see orhear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can geta little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning contikties, pull over,stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
If there’s stillno sign of steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is about twice as fast asnormal idle
speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, ifyou still have the warning, turn ofSthe
engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it
cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D).
5-13
Cooling System (Gasoline Engines)
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
The coolant level should be ator above the FULL
COLD mark.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Fan(s)
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
5-14
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and
you could be burned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in theradiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
NOTICE:
I
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
I
I
If there seems to beno leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
I NOTICE:
If you haven’t founda problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean water (preferably distilled) and [email protected]
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank.
(See
“Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for more information.)
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but
you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others couldbe burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
5-16
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
I
.. .
I
CAUTION:
You can be burnedif you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
I
--
even a lit
ey can come out
pressure cap
at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the
cooling system, includingthe radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to
turn the pressurecap.
0-
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling
system is coolbefore you do it,
Steam and scalding liquids from a cooling
hot
system canblow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and
if you turn the radiator
CAUTION: (Continued
5-17
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-18
3. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
(See "Engine Coolant" in the Index for more
information about theproper coolant mixture.)
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
I
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck maybe lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-20
.....
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressurecap line up like this.
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, thefan spins faster to provide moreair
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or
high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the
clutch more fully engages.So you may hear an increase in
fan noise. This is normal and should not
be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is
merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan
will slow down when additional cooling is not required
and the clutch partially disengages.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintainyour tires properly.If air goes
out of a tire, it’s muchmore likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the trafficlane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot fromthe
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicleto go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, thenext part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
-
-
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle
you or other
can slipoff the jack and roll over
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find alevel place to change your tire.
To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake
firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in
PARK (P).
3. Xhrn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won't move,
you can put blocks at the front and ofrear
the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-22
The following steps will tell you howto use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
.::.. . ...,..,
...
... .
.
.j
Unless your vehicle hasa flat rear tire, do not remove
or restore a tire f r o d t o a storage position under the
vehicle while thevehicle is supported by a jack. Always
tighten thetire fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restoring.
If you have a vehicle which wascompleted from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
supplierhnstaller.
The spare tire is a full size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the ratchet and extension to lower
the spare tire.
A flatrear tire reduces clearance to remove the spare
tire. If there is less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) between
the ground and the rearbumper or any trailer hitch, jack
up the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground. (See
“Removing the Flat Tire” and“Installing the Spare
Tire,” Steps 4 through 8, in this section.)
For cargo vans, and all
passenger vans except those
with the 15-passenger
seating arrangement, the
jack is secured in the rear
passenger side corner of
the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
5-23
The ratchet has a DOWN side and an UP side.
For vans with the 15-passenger seating arrangement,
the jack is secured on the rear passenger side floor of
the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.
5-24
Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN side facing you, to
the extension. The extension has a socket end and a flat
chisel end.
Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through the
hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. Be sure
the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
.
. -.
Turn the ratchet to the left to lower the spare tire to the
ground. If you are changing a flat rear tire and the
vehicle is already jacked up, use thejack handle and
extension to hook the cable. Then pull the spare from
beneath the vehicle.If the retainer pulls out, hook the
inside of the wheel and pullthe spare tire out from under
the vehicle.
I NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive
vehicle before the cableis restored.
I
I
When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening.
5-25
Jacking Tool Storage
A. Socket
B. Jack Handle
C. Ratchet
D. Jacking Tool Storage Box
E. Jack Handle Extension
5-26
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), socket (D) and
the ratchet (E).
Removing the Wheel Coversand Locking
Wheel Nuts
I
2. Loosen the plastic nut caps.
1 . You will need to take off the wheel nut caps to reach
your wheel nuts. When using the ratchetand socket,
make sure the DOWN side faces you.
5-27
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
3. Remove the center cap.
1. With the DOWN side facing you, use the ratchet and
socket to loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove
them yet.
5-28
2. The jackhas a bolt on the end. Attach the socket end
of the extension to the jack bolt.
Front Position
Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
3. Rotate the ratchet to the right. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
5-29
CAUTION:
Getting under avehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Rear Position
4. Position jack under the vehicle as shown.
5-30
A -CAUTION:
- -
-
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage thevehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts, and take off the
flat tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet to the right.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
5-31
8. Replace the wheel nuts
with the roundedend of
the nuts towardthe
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nutby hand until
the wheel is heldagainst
the hub.
I A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt
on thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts
become loose after atime. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
the
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel
to do this; but
be sure touse a scraper or wire
brush later,if you need to, to get allthe rust or
dirt off.
IA
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs ornuts. If you
do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheelcould
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-32
9. Lower the vehicle by rotating the jack handle to the
left. Lower the jack completely.
I
1
10. Tighten the nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Rotate the wheel
wrench to the right.
/1\ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and evencome off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to 140 lb-ft (190 Nmm).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto
brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Put the wheelcover back on, ifyou have one.
Remove any wheel blocks.
Remember that the jack, jackingequipment and tire
must be properly stored in their original storage
position before you begin driving again. The next
part will show you how.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
A CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire
or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop collision,
or
loose
equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these
in the properplace.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down.
5-33
2. Pull the retaining bar throughthe center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
5-34
3. Pull the wheel toward the rearof the vehicle keeping
the cable tight.
4. Attach the ratchet, with the UP side facing you, to
the extension.
5. Put the flat end of the extension onan angle through
the hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper.
Turn the ratchet to the right until thetire is against
the underside of the vehicle.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is up all the
way. Try to move the tire with your hands
to make
sure it is securely in place.
Return the jacking equipment to the properlocation.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
5-35
I NOTICE:
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
What you don’t wantto do when your vehicle isstuck is
to spin your wheelstoo fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you getout when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
1 A CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin
a t high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And,
the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-36
Spinning yourwheels can destroy partsof your
vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin thewheels
too fastwhile shifting your transmission back
and forth,you can destroy your transmission.
1
For information about usingtire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehi
:o Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheelleft and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels.Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE(R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal whileyou shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. If
that doesn’t getyou out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
b%J NOTES
b
NOTES
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you willfind information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins withservice and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6- 2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6- 8
6-11
6- 12
6- 16
6- 17
6-2 1
6-2 1
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-3 1
Service
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuels in Foreign Countries (Gasoline Engines)
Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Noise Control System
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield WasherFluid
Brakes
Battery
6-32
6-32
6-40
6-4 1
6-5 1
6-5 1
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-57
6-57
6-59
6-60
6-6 1
6-66
6-67
6- 69
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Bulbs
Windshield WiperBlade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
Finish Damage
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to
be happy with it.We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine
GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the properGM Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,see
“Service and Owner Publications”in the Index.
We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:
Genuine
Parts
6-2
Your vehicle may havean air bag system. If it does,
see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle”in the
Index before attemptingto do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list
the mileage and thedate of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
You can be injured and your
vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
0 Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can beeasily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners,parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
L
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it.This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DieselEngine
Supplement. For vehicles withgasoline engines,
please read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meetspecifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have
been developed by the AmericanAutomobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
meeting the AAMA specification could provide
improved driveability andemission control system
protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s badenough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re usingfuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
1
1
,
~
~
i
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
To provide cleaner air,all gasolines inthe United States
Standards (inhcated on the underhood emission control
label), it isdesigned to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance maybe affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may
turn on andor your
return
vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. If this occurs,
to your authorizedGM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In theevent it is.determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulatedfor low
emissions contain an octane-enhancingadditive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your servicestation operator whether or not hisfuel
contains MMT. General Motors does notrecommend the
use of such gasolines.If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance maybe affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, returnto your authorized
GM dealer for service.
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in yourengine and fuel
system, allowing your emissioncontrol system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not haveto add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they
comply with the
specifications described earlier.
6-4
I
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t .use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
(Gasoline Engines)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle hasa diesel engine, see “Filling Your
Tank (“DieselEngine)” in theDiesel Engine Supplement.
1
1 The fuel cap is behind a
hinged dooron the driver’s
side of your vehicle.
To check on fuel availability, ask anauto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
YOU can
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
7
A
6-5
While refueling your
vehicle, hang thecap by
the tether from the hook
on the filler door.
A CAUTION:
If you get gasolineon yourself and then
something ignites it,
you could be badly burned.
on you if you open the
Gasoline can spray out
fuel filler cap too
quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and is more
likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap
slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the
way.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring backto the right.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in theIndex.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one you.
for If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”
in
the Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
/i\ CAUTIOlr:
Never filla portable fuel container
while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your
vehicle damaged if this
you and others:
occurs. To help avoid injury to
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is insidea
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
To open the hood,first
pull this handle inside the
vehicle. It isjust in front of
the driver’s side doorframe
near the floor.
Checking Things Under the Hood
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan under the
hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothingand tools awayfrom any
underhood electric fan.
A CAUTION:
Things that burn can
get on hot engine parts
and starta fire. These includeliquids like
gasoline or diesel fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic
or rubber. You or others could be burned.
Be
careful notto drop orspill things thatwill burn
onto a hot engine.
6-8
I
Lift the hood, release the
hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into
the slot in thehood hinge.
The underhood lamp
will automatically come
on and stay on until the
hood is closed.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:
I
A. Battery
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C . Engine Oil Dipstick
6-10
D. Engine Oil Fill
E. Transmission Dipstick
E Air Cleaner
G . Power Steering Reservoir
H. Brake Master Cylinder
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
If your vehicle has a 7.4 liter engine and air
conditioning, your vehicle will have aauxiliary
engine fanin addition to the belt driven fan.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly.
Then lift the hood torelieve pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hoodand
return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the hood
down and close itfirmly.
Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with
Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noiseemission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The
noise control system warranty is given in your
Warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing
thereof
1 . The removal or rendering inoperative by anyperson,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose
of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element
of design has been removedor rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or underhood insulation.
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if
equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed to
exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan andDrive:
0
0
Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
If your vehicle hasa diesel engine, see “Engine Oil
Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
It’s a good idea to check yourengine oil every timeyou
get fuel. In order to get anaccurate reading, the oil must
be warm andthe vehicle must be onlevel ground.
Air Intake:
0
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
0
Reversing the air cleaner cover.
Exhaust:
0 Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
0
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.
6-12
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
--
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow handle andis
located near thecenter of
the engine compartment.
Turn off the engine and
give the oil a few minutes
to drain back into theoil
pan. If you don’t, theoil
dipstick might notshow
the actual level.
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.If your engine hasso
much oil that theoil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil isat or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
The engine oil filler cap is located between the coolant
recovery tank andthe air cleaner.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstickall the way
back in when you’re through.
RECOMMENDED SAE YlSCOSllY GRADEENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE 011 FOR THEEXPECTEDTEMPERATURERANGE.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified
by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
HOT
WEATHER
t
1f you change your own
oil, be sure you use oil that
has the Starburst symbol
on the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosityoil for your
vehicle, as shown in the followingchart:
LOOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL
atfi
A
J
I
I
.
SAt d-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE ME 20W.50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOTRECOMMENDED
I
As shown in thechart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, youcan use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going
to be 0"F (- 18" C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls
below -20°F (-29 "C), consider using either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both
will provide easier cold starting and better protection
for your engine atextremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short tripkity
maintenance schedule:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of themis true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highwayconditions causes engine oil
to break down slower.
Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines)
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don't let used oil stayon your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash
or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threatto the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don't ever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash,pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking itto a place that collects used oil. If
you havea problem properlydisposing of your usedoil,
ask your dealer, a service station
or a local recycling
center for help.
6-
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Loosen the screw bolt to air induct hose.
2. Remove the three bolts holding the air cleaner
housing in place.
3. Remove the full air housing.
4. Unsnap the three clips.
Then tilt the top cover up and back to
expose the
filter element.
5. Install a new filter element with the folds in the
down position.
I NOTICE:
I
Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to replace the air cleaner.
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
See “Normal Replacement Parts” for the proper filter
to use.
damaging engine fire.And, dirt caneasily get
into yourengine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place
when you’re driving.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter and crankcase ventilation filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
I
/!1 CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the
air cleaner off can
cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops flame
if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned.Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaneroff.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Automatic
Transmission Fluid” in the DieselSupplement.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’sGVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90”F (32”C ) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
6-17
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not
over 8,600 and you
do not use your vehicle under
any of these conditions,
change the fluid and filter every 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
Wait at least30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operationcan be a little difficult, you
may choose to have thisdone at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, besure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
Be
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, thefluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to93“C). See“Checking Transmission Fluid
Hot” in the Index.
Checking Transmission Fluid Hot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles
(24 km) whenoutside temperatures are above50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (lO”C), drive the
vehicle in in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remainssteady for 10 minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eighthours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F ( 10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more
accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Hot
or Cold
0
0
0
0
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot onthe brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
,.,
I
1. The transmission dipstick has a red handle and is
located near thecenter of the engine compartment.
Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick
and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine’what
kind of transmissionfluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” inthe Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (Acold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level upto the HOT area
for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally
less than one It (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or inthe HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected], becausefluid with that label
is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other thanDEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “Howto Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all theway; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Rear Axle
What to Use
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicleis filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in yourvehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 kmg whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL extended life coolant.
8
The following explains your cooling system and howto
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the
Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected]
coolant will:
0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 “ F (129”C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
What to Use
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, is
it important thatyou
use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL
is added to
the system, premature engine, heater coreor
radiator corrosion mayresult. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
by the
is not
use of coolant other than [email protected]
covered by yournew vehicle warranty.
--
6-22
Use amixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and [email protected] which
won’t damage aluminum parts. If youuse this mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
I
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can
boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning systemis set for the
proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,
you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve thesystem. These can be harmful.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level shoiAd be at
FULL COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL'
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and itwill burn if the engineparts arehot
enough. Don't spill coolant on
a hot engine.
I
Wrning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can
allow steam
and scalding liquids to
blow out and burnyou
badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
you will
almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are
hot.
--
--
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
6-24
Radiator Pressure Cap
The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on
the radiatorfiller neck.
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss
and possible enginedamage from overheating.
Be sure the arrowson the capline up with the
overflow tube on the radiator fillerneck.
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine cooling system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
It is not necessaryto regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in thissystem
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When you replace your thermostat, an [email protected]
is recommended.
Power
:ring !
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap
and the top ofthe reservoir clean, then unscrew the
cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace
the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the
cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, addonly enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the powersteering reservoir with thebrake master
cylinder cover off.
6-25
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
a
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you needwindshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
p
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
I
Brakes
Brake Fluid
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid
tank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allowsfor expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damagethe tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer.It can damage
your washer systemand paint.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It isfilled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-27
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
There are onlytwo reasons why the brake fluid levelin the
to check your brakefluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
is that the brake fluid
reservoir might go down. The first
Inspections” in the Index.
goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake
lining wear. When new linings are putin, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out Checking Brake Fluid
of the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, sincea leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work all.
at
So, it isn’t a good ideato “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correcta leak. Ifyou add fluid
when yourlinings are worn, thenyou’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add
(or remove) brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis
done on the brakehydraulic system.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engineis
hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done
on the brake
hydraulic system.
6-28
You can checkthe brake fluid without takingoff the cap.
Just look at the brakefluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be aboveMIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level isabove the MIN but not over
the MAX mark or thetop of the window on the side
of the reservoir.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme [email protected](GM Part
No. 12377967).Use new brake fluid froma sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
A CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. Forexample, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine
oil, in yourbrake system can damagebrake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill
brake
fluid on your vehicle.If you do, washit off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
With the wrong kind of fluid in yourbrake
system, your brakes may not work well,or they
may not even workat all. This could cause
a
crash. Always usethe proper brakefluid.
6-29
Brake Wear
Your vehicle hasfront disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle
is moving (except when youare pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. Whentires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM specifications.
r
I
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear
indicators, but
if you ever heara rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should beremoved and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have thefront brake padsreplaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete
axle sets.
7 of this
See “Brake System Inspection’’ in Section
manual under PartC “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.’’
Brake Pedal Travel
See yourdealer if the brake pedal does not return
to
normal height, orif there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Battery
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Every new vehicle has an ACDelco [email protected]
You never have toadd water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco
Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of
top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brakelinings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come toexpect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
If you have a diesel engine, you have two batteries. The
primary battery is located on the passenger’s side of the
engine compartment. The second battery is located on
the driver’s side framerail.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
6-31
A
Bulb
CAUTION:
Batteries haveacid that can burnyou and gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt
if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting’’ in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
.
Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, besure that all the lamps
are off andthe engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” inthe index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulb.
I A.CAUTION:
I
Contact your dealer tolearn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
.
-1
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burstif you drop or scratch the bulb.You or
others could be injured.
Be sure to read and
follow the
instructions
on
the
package.
bulb
Headlamps
You have either a sealed beam headlamp system or a
composite system.
Sealed Beam Headlamps
2. Unplug the lamp assembly from the connector.
3. Install a new headlamp.
I
1. Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer.
Pull the retainer out and set it aside.
4. Reverse the previous steps to reinstall the headlamp.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Locate the rear side of each of the headlamps.
5. Install a new bulb. Do not handle the glass part
of thebulb.
6. Reverse the previous steps to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb assembly from the back of the
headlamp on the driver’s side by turning the bulb
to the left one quarter of a turn.
4. On the passenger’s side, turn thebulb to the right
one quarter of a turn. Also, toremove the bulb on the
passenger’s side, you will need to move the battery.
6-34
Front Parkin-rn Signal
Lamps
To replace the front parkingkurn signal lamps:
2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
1. Remove the outer screws from the parkinghrn
signal lamp lens assembly. (There are either two or
four screws, depending on your vehicle’s trim level.)
Sidemarker Lamps
3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb assembly
while turningit to the left. Remove thebulb
assembly from the backof the lens and replace
the bulb.
Reverse Steps 2 and 3 to replace the bulb. Turn
the socket to the right to replace it in thelens
assembly. Replace the screws on the parking/turn
signal lamp assembly.
6-36
1. Remove the screwfrom the top of the lens.
Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.
2. Unclip the bottom of the lamp from the grille.
3. Remove the bulb by twisting it out of the socket.
Turn the bulb to remove it. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp.
2. Push the socket protector until you can see
the fasteners.
6-37
--.
I
3. Remove the nuts with a deep socket wrench.
6-38
.
4. Remove the hidden upper nuts.
5. Lift the lamp as you
rotate it toward the rear
of the vehicle.
6. Squeeze the tab on the side of the sockets while
turning them to the left to remove.
6-39
I
Windshield Wiper
Blade
Replacement
7. Turn the bulb to the left toremove it. Install the
new bulb.
8. Reverse the above steps to reinstall the lamp.
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index for the proper type of replacement blade.
Replacement blades come in different types andare
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip:
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
6-40
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insertfrom the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
4. To install the newwiper insert, slide the notched
end last, into the end with two blade claws. Slide
the insert all the way through the blade claws atthe
opposite end.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws areproperly
locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until thepivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
Tires
Yo%fS%%vvehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your GM Warranty booklet for details.
A CAUTIOI.:
Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating asa result of too much friction.
You could havean air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in
the Index.
0 Underinflated tirespose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tiresare cold.
0 Overinflated tires are more
likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as whenyou hit a pothole.
Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replacethem.
--
6-41
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certificationrnire label, which ison the rear edge of
the driver’s door,shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has beensitting for at least three hoursor driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation),
you can
get thefollowing:
0 Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
0 Bad wear
0 Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much
air (overinflation),
you can get thefollowing:
Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
0 Roughride
0 Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
Be sure to put the valvecaps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels,
also see “Dual Tire Operation” later in this section.
If your vehicle hassingle rear wheels, always useone of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
6-43
~.
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use
one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, besure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front
and rear inflation pressuresas shown on the
Certificationflire label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque’’
in the Index.
6-44
Rust or dirt onwheel,
a
or on the parts towhich
it is fastened, can make
wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places wherewheel
the
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a clothor a papertowel to dothis; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush iflater,
you
off. (See
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
When It’s Time forNew Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the sizeor location
of thedamage.
Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut isreplaced, check the wheel nut
torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque,see “Wheel
Nut Torque” in theIndex.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wearmore
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on
high-crown roads, youcan reduce tire wear by adding
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires. Be
sure to return to the recommended pressures whenno
longer driving under those conditions. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
6-45
__
I A CAUTION:
If you operate yourvehicle witha tire thatis
An
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat.
overheated tire canlose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured.
Be sure all
tires (including the spare)are properly inflated.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind andsize of tires you need, look at
the CertificatiodTire label.
had
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When youget new tires,
get ones with that sameTPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires havean all-season tread
design, the TPC number will befollowed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with thosenot having a
TPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size,
load range, speed ratingand construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires couldcause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tireson allwheels.
TIION:
If you usebias-ply tireson your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving.A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use onlyradial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction andtemperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on thesidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading system does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics andclimate.
-action
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B,
and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on
wet pavementas measured undercontrolled conditions
on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering(turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’sresistance to the generation of
heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the
material of thetire to degenerate and reducetire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passengercar tires must meet
6-48
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separatelyor in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.
Wheel Alignment ant
’e Balance
The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longesttire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However,if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the
alignment may needto be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road,
your wheels may needto be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts shouldbe
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheelyou need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as theone it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will besure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
I A CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose
air and makeyou lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others couldbe
injured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel
bolts andwheel nuts for replacement.
I NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems
with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheelbolt or wheel nut is replaced
after
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles ( 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque’’
in the Index.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Indexfor more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
Putting aused wheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. Ifyou have to replacea
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
6-50
NOTICE:
Use tire chainsonly where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper
size for your
tires. Install themon the tiresof the rearaxle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can
hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop
and retighten them.If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or
spinning thewheels with chains onwill
damage yourvehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Acetone
0
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manualsays you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get ridof dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-SolventDry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots andstains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.(See
“Appearance Care and Materials’’in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0 Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to
a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brushthe area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powderedcleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow IO
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-52
ric Protection
Cleaning Leather
lour vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
treated with Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still needto clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild
soap Or
saddle soap and wipe dry with asoft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heatto dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and aclean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t get them off quickly.Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner.See your dealer
for this product.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mildsoap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult tosee through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
.
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Care of Safety Belts
Keep beltsclean and d
I
I
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleanedoften. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glasscleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they
may cause scratches. Avoid placing decalson the inside
rear window, sincethey may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the insideof the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary licenseshould not be attached across the
defogger grid.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield withGM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon
Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 105OO11. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
A
m
i
@
to the wiper blades
Grime from the windshield will stick
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade withwater.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, andnot stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean clothat least every six
months. During verycold, damp weather morefrequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your vehicle may have a “basecoatklearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
I
I
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finishmay dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
I
Foreign materials suchas calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, roadoil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soonas possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Keep your wheelsclean using a soft cleancloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse withclean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry witha soft clean towel. A wax
may thenbe applied.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
a period
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over
of years. You can help tokeep the paint finishlooking
new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Don’t take your vehicle through
an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tirecleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you mayuse chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner.
If your vehicle isdamaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body
or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products
may damage
the paint finish.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode
quickly and maydevelop into a majorrepair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paintshop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody.If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular darkspots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring,flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud
and other debris cancollect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge tothe owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damagedby this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occursfirst.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold
by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversionsor equipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052870
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
32 02. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
DESCRIPTION
USAGE
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass Chrome
Removes soil and black marksfrom whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Cleans and lightly
waxes
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, PlexiglasN , plastic,
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
ArmorAll
Protectant
rubber and vinyl
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner
and floor mats
1052929
Wheel Cleaner
Spray on and rinse with water
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
1052930
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils
8 02. (0.237 L)
Cleans and shines a variety of surface types
12345002
16 02. (0.473 L)
Armor All Cleaner
Shines vehicle without scratching
12345721
Synthetic Chamois
2.5 sq. ft.
Spray on tire shine
12345725
Silicone Tire Shine
12 oz. (0.354 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377964
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Cleaner Wax
12377966
16 02. (0.473 L)
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Surface Cleaner
12377984
16 02. (0.473 L)
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See “Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.
..___
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identific on Label
~
YOU'^^ find this labelon the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
Ir;hll
SAMPLE4UXWM072675
kl
yourVIN,
e the model designation,
paint information and
This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle. Itappears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
e a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed
from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment
as
can keep other components from working
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flicker on and off, or insome cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy
snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motorcools.
Although the circuitis protected from electrical
overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the the windshieldbefore using the windshield
wipers. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
In,c*rume-t Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel above
the hood release lever.
You can remove the cover
by turning the fastener to
the left.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
Be sure to use the correct fuse. If you ever have a
problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse,
you can borrow one of the correct value. Just pick
some feature of your vehicle thatyou can get along
without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use
its fuse, if it is of the value youneed. Replace it as
soon as you can.
FUSE BLOCK INFORMATION
POSITION
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
1.
STOP
StopKHMSL, Stoplamps
2.
HTD hfIR
Electric Heated Mirrors
3.
CTSY
Courtesy Lamps, Dome/RDG Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors
4.
GAUGES
IP Cluster, DRL Relay, DRLModule, HDLP Switch, Keyless Entry
Illumination, Low Coolant Module, CHIME Module, DRAB Module
5.
HAZARD
Hazard Lamps/CHIME Module
6.
CRUISE
Cruise Control
7.
PWR AUX
Auxiliary Power Outlet, DLC
8.
CRANK
9.
PARK LPS
License Plate Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps, Front Sidemarkers, Glove
Box Ashtray
10.
AIR BAGS
Air Bags
11.
WIPER
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
12.
HTR-A/C
A/C, A/C Blower, High Blower Relay, HTD Mirror
13.
CIG LTR
Cigarette Lighter
14.
ILLUM
IP Cluster, HVAC Controls, RR HVAC Controls, IP Switches, Radio
Illumination, Door Switch Illumination
POSITION NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
15.
DRL
DRL Relay
16.
TURN B/U
Front Turn, RR Turn, Back-upLamps, BTSI Solenoid
17.
RADIO- 1
Radio (Ign, Accy), Upfitter Provision Relav
18.
BRAKE
4WAL PCM, ABS, Cruise Control
19.
RADIO-B
Radio (Battery), Power Antenna
20.
TRANS
PRNDL, Automatic Transmission
21.
SECURITYISTRG
EVO Steering, Passlock
22.
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defog
23.
Not Used
24.
FW HVAC
RR HVAC Controls, HIGH, MED, LOW Relays
A.
PWR ACCY
Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry
Illumination Module
B.
PWR WDO
Power Windows
Fuse amperage levels are imprinted on the fuse panel under the dash.
6-64
Engine Compartment Fuse Relay Center
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
The fuseblock is on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment at the rear.
IGN-B
Ignition Switch
IGN-A
Starter Relay, Ignition Switch
BATT
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
LIGHTING
Instrument Panel Fuse Block,
Headlamp Switch
RR BLOWER
Rear Auxiliary Blower Motor Relays
ENG-I
Heated 0 2 Sensors, Mass Air Flow
Sensor, EGR ValveSolenoid, Evap
Canister Purge Valve, Crankshaft
Position Sensor, Secondary Air
Injection Relay (Diesel), Water in
Fuel Sensor (Diesel), Fuel Heater
(Diesel), Glowplug Relay (Diesel),
Wastegate Solenoid (Diesel)
AIC
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
SPARE
Spare Fuses
AUX A
Upfitter Provisions
AUX B
Upfitter Provisions
RH-HDLP
Right-hand Headlamp (Export only)
U
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
BLOWER
Front Blower Motor
ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
RH-HIBM
Right-hand High-beam Headlamp
(Export only)
ECM-I
Ignition Coil, Camshaft Position
Sensor, VCM, Fuel Injectors, Coil
Driver
HORN
Horn Relay, Underhood Lamp(s)
LH-HDLP
Left-hand Headlamp (Export only)
LH-HIBM
Left-hand High-beam Headlamp
(Export only)
FUEL SOL
PCM, Fuel Solenoid Driver,Engine
Shutoff Solenoid
IGN-E
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
ECM-B
Fuel Pump Relay, VCM, PCM, Fuel
Pump and Engine Oil Pressure
Switch
Replacement Bulbs
LAMP OR BULB
Sealed BeamHeadlamps
Composite Low-Beam
Headlamps
Composite High-Beam
Headlamps
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Parking and TurnLamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Rear Parking, Stop, and
Turn Lamp
CHMSL
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
Reel Lamp
Reading Lamps
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
QTY NUMBER
2
H6054
2
6052
2
9005
2
4
2
2
194
2357NA
3057
3057
3 156
1156
1157
6
4
921
194
232
232
211-2
74
Capacities and Specifications
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the timeof printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as thepart used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the bodymanufacturer’s publications.
Engine Identification-- Gasoline Engines
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
Type
V6
V8
V8
V8
VIN Code
w
M
R
J
CSFI’
CSFI 1
CSFI’
Engine
Fuel System
lCentra1 Sequential Fuel Injection
2Sequential Fuel Injection
Wheel Nut Torque
MODEL
All
TORQUE
140 ft-lb (190 Nem)
SFI~
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
ENGINE
VIN Heater
Without
Rear
QTY
QTY With Rear Heater
“VORTEC”4300
W
11 Quarts ( 10.4 L)
14 Quarts (13.2 L)
“VORTEC”5000
M
17 Quarts (16 L)
20 Quarts (18.9 L)
“VORTEC”5700
R
17 Quarts (16 L)
20 Quarts (18.9 L)
“VORTEC”7400
J
23 Quarts (2 1.8 L)
26 Quarts (24.6 L)
After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Cooling System” in Section 5.
Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)
ENGINE
“VORTEC”4300
“VORTEC”5000
VIN Filter With
Quantity
W
4.5 Quarts (4.3 L)
M
5 Quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC”5700
R
5 Quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC”7400
J
6.6 Quarts (6.24 L)
After refill, the level MUST be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the properoperating
range. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
*Add one additional quart for RPO 5Z1 and RPO KL5 Models.
6-68
Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
MODEL TYPE
QUANTITY
TYPE
Standard Tank
31 Gallons (117.33 L)
Passenger andCargo
Standard Tank
33 Gallons (124.90 L)
Cab and Chassis
Optional Tank*
55 Gallons (208.18 L)
Cab and Chassis
** 159”, 177” Wheelbase Vehicles Only.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Engine
VIN
PF52
Valve
W
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner Filter *
“VORTEC”5700
“VORTEC”7400
M
R
J
PF1218
PF1218
PF1218
A917C
A917C
“VORTEC”5000
“VORTEC”4300
A917C
17C A9
CV789C
cv774c
cv774c
cv774c
Spark Plugs
4 1-932
4 1-932
4 1-932
4 1-932
Fuel Filter
GF48 1
GF48 1
GF48 1
GF48 1
Radiator Cap
RC36
RC36
RC36
RC36
PCV
* Replace with AC Air Filter, Part No. A917C and for severe dusty conditions, use AC Air Filter, Part No. 1236C.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioningrefrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
TYPE
QTY Front Only
Refrigerant
R- 134a
3.00 lbs. (1.36 kg)
6-70
QTY Front
and Rear
4.5 lbs. (2.04 kg)
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
NOTICE:
R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12
refrigerant in anair conditioning system. R-12 in
an R-134a system will cause compressor failure,
refrigerant oil sludge, or poor air conditioning
system performance.
fi
NOTES
6-71
@bNOTES
6-72
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Definition
Short TripKity Intervals
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
7-a
7-27
7-38
7-42
7-44
7-46
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks at Each Fuel Fill-up
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
I
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE
RECOMMENDED
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. Seeyour
Warranty andOwner Assistancebooklet, or yourGM
dealer for details.
7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance notonly helps to keep your
vehicle in good workingcondition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the
air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflationcan increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to some
do jobs, you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
‘Tart B: Owner Checks and Services”
tells you what
be
checked
and
when.
It
also
explains
what you
should
in good condition.
can easily do to help keep your vehicle
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists
some recommended products to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether youdo the work
yourself or haveit done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performedon your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to write it down inthis part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should
be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be neededto qualify your vehiclefor
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want toget the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications’’
in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Mainten: .ce
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather.You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou may drive it to work,
to do errands orin many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll
find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how youdrive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you shouldschedule them. If you
go to yourdealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supportedservice people will
perform the work using genuineGM parts.
7-4
The proper fluidsand lubricants to use are listed in PartD.
Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationnire label,See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide whichof the two schedulesis
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Gasoline engine vehicles and diesel engine vehicles
have different maintenance requirements.If you have a
diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel
engine vehicles only.
See the Diesel EngineSupplement for diesel engine
maintenance schedules.
Maintenance Schedule
Short Trip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner:
Short Trip/City Intervals -- Gasoline Engines
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only). Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Intervals -- Gasoline Engines I
b m n g TripMighway Definition -- GasolineEngines
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km):Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative ControlSystem Inspection.
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the
conditions from theShort Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is usedfor trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use theShort Trip/City schedulefor
these conditions.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
7-6
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slowex
I
Maintenance Schedule
Long Tripmighway Intervals -- Gasoline Engines
I
Long Tripmighway Intervals -- Gasoline Engines
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only).
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Front
Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
7-7
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at thesame intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles(240 000 km) should be performedat
the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km).
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections”following.
* * Drive
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air ResourcesBoard has determined thatthe
failure to perform this maintenanceitem will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
steering linkage and reardriveline center splines.
+ A good timeto check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
axle service(see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Indexfor proper lubricant to use):
0
0
0
7-8
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid andrefill
every 15,000 miles (25000 km).
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at everyoil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
More frequent lubrication may be requiredfor
heavy-duty use.
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
3,000 Miles (5000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
I
DATE
-~
n4TE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
MILEAGE
7-9
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dustyconditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
7-10
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
I
DATE
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I SERVICEDBY I
I
DATE
SERVICED BY:
1
7-11
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-12
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
DATE
I
MILEAGE
7-13
I
--
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis Components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
17 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-14
DATE
ACTUAL
.EAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
DATE
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 1
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
7-15
-
--
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
48.000
Miles (80 000 km),
,
\
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
17 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is
over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or moreof
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter atIO0,OOO miles ( I 66 000 km).
7-16
DATE
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
DATE
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
ISERVICKI
I
I SERVICEDBY I
1
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
60,000 Miles (I00 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle tluid level and addfluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occursfirst).
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shieldsand underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This isa
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the
United Stutes.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An E~nissionControl Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system inspection as described in
the service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
7-18
MILEAGE
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
0 Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge
valve works properly (ifequipped). Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
I
DATE
!
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-19
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-20
MILEAGE
I
--
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
CI Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote”f)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Sewice. Applicable only to vehicles soldin the
United States.
7-21
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline zngines I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
I
DATE
MILEAGE
I
DATE
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-22
DATE
*‘“IJAL
MILEAGE
1
SERVICED BY:
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnoteJf.)
(Continued)
MILEAGE
7-23
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.This isa
Noise EmissionControl Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the
United States.
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-24
I DATE
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I DATE
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICED BY:
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
17 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
17 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is
over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C)or higher.
I
I
1
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY I
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
(Continued)
7-25
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
1
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 If you haven’t usedyour vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’tchanged your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressurecap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
MILEAGE
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
## Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
steering linkage and rear driveline center splines.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at everyengine oil change.
7-27
1 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
-=
Gasoline Engines
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
I7 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
7-28
I DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
Long.TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines”
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
I DATE
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote *4’.)
0 Clean and repackthe front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for
proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-29
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
17 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehiclessold in the
United States.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
7-30
MILEAGE
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This isa
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the
United Stutes.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 M
-YS , I 3 000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is
over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICED
BY
(Continued)
7-31
Long Triphlighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) (Continued)
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, policeor delivery service.
If you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (Seefootnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occursfirst).
7-32
I DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is CI
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in
the service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vaporlines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge
valve works properly,if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
*
7-33
I Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.(See footnote **.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This isa
Noise Ernission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
7-34
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
SERVICED B Y
1
__
1
--
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
82,500 Miles (137 500km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. (See footnote *‘I:.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICEDBY
I DATE
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
El Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote 2::i:.)
0 Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emissio1z Corltr-ol Service. (See footnote*.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
-
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICED B Y
(Continued)
7-35
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (Seefootnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote**.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
17 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission ControlService.
7-36
+
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I DATE
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
I
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is
over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 If you haven’t used yourvehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed yourautomatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY:
I
[
Part B: Ownc
Tlhecks and Scvices
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability andemission control
performance of your vehicle.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level andadd [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Indexfor further details.
Be sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,as shown
in Part D.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tankand add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160,1600 and 10 000 km)
At Least Once a Month
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut
torque. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”in
the Index.
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to thecorrect pressures. See
“Tires” in the Indexfor further details.
At Each Fuel Fill
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” inthe
Index for further details.
I t is important for you or n service station attendant to
pet$orm these underhood checks at each fitel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
7-38
...
,east Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look forany opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield.Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index. Afluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
At Least Oncea Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lockcylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood hinges, hood prop rod pivot, fuel
filler door, rear compartment hinges, latches, locks and
any moving seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter SwitchCheck
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
When you are doingthis check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2 . Firmly apply both theparking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if
necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
7-40
I
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It shouldbe parked
on a level surface.
2 . Firmly apply the parking brake(see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t startthe engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normaleffort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position,
0
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
P A R K (P) MerhslnicTn Vhmk
1 A CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot onthe regular brake,set the
parking brake.
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle
could begin tomove. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the
vehicle beginto move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-41
__
Part C: Periodic Main !n: Ice
Inspections
A
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for
instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service
department or otherqualified service centerdo these
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering
system for damaged,loose or missing parts, signsof
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
7-42
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as wellas open seams,
holes, loose connectionsor other conditions which
could cause a heat build-upin the floor pan or could
let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses andhave them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator andair conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressuretest of the cooling
system and pressurecap is recommended atleast once
a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequent braking.
Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and if
add
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair ifit needed.
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil
(Gasoline
Engine)
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’sengine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
7-44
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM [email protected]@
or [email protected]@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GMPart
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI ## 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
% (GM Part
Superlube
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
@
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
USAGE
~
~~
FLUIDLUBRICANT
~
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
One-Piece
Propshaft Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special
Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345879) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 998530.
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel Bearing Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1051344 or equivalent).
Differential,
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or SAE SOW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
[email protected] Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM [email protected] Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Propshaft
Splines and
Universal Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-45
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled servicesare performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performedthe service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
all
the following record pages. Also, you should retain
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
I
DATE
I
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAr- -rENANCE PERFORMED
7-47
Maintenance Record
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-48
Section 8 CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8- 10
8-11
8-11
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date informationto promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, ifa concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally,concerns can
be quickly resolved at that
level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with thesales, service or parts
manager, contactthe owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
A
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member
of
dealership management,it appears your concern
cannot be resolvedby the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 13 15
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-41 12.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
For promptassistance, please have thefollowing
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address,home and business
telephone numbers
0
Vehicle IdentificationNumber (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top leftof the instrument panel andvisible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage
Nature of concern
0
0
0
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty andOwner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the
dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer
Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy” Care:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e,,
wrecker services, locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
ROADSIDE Courtesy" Care PROVIDES:
a Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
a FREE Non-Warranty Towing(to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
a FREE LocksmithKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
a FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
a FREE Jump Start (at homeor on the road)
a FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers CourtesyTransportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks.(Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retaillease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. AllCourtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the rightto
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at anytime.
8-6
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurredfor
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where youcan be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased inCanada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service.Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with thecoverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
to five days,OR
for any overnight warranty repair up
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repair upto five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair upto five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by yourChevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actualcosts.
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation is not partof the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the rightto make any changesor
discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time
without notification.
0 For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make it impracticalto
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse upto $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during theComplete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation maybe available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only inthe United States andCanada.
0
In Canada,please consult yourGM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlierin this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked toprovide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize theCustomer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at anytime. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make adecision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily takeabout 40 days from the
time you file a claim until adecision is made.
Some state laws may require youto use this program
before filing a claim with astate-run arbitration program
or in the courts.For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTINGSAFETYDE€:CTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in additionto
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in
a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer
or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area)or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
Ordering Serviceand Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation
and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book
and mailing it inwith your check, money order,
or creditcard information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
vehicle. The owner’s manualwill include the Maintenance
electrical, steering, body, etc.
Schedule for all models.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-782-4356
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
Helm, Incorporated PO. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Disr)
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders
Only)
1-800-782-4356
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
I-
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
9
9
8
Orders will be mailed within 10 days
of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address sghown below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1998
$90.00
1998
$40.00
Owner's Manual In Portfolio
1998
$15.00
Owner's Manual Without Portfolio
1998
$10.00
T
0
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer
or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outsideU S A . please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER'S NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
(ATTENTION)
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
~
(CITY)
(STATE)
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
G
M
S
H
I
P
II YEAR
QTYm
(ZIP CODE)
TOTAL
PRICE
TOTAL MATERIAL
P
A
Order
payable
to
add
Helm,
Inc. (USA funds
only - do not sendcash.)
Y
.
u
Michigan
Purchasers
6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
Mastercard
VISA
M
E
N
T
Discover
I'
GRAND TOTAL
I
uInuInu I n
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
ml
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
i
GM-CHE-ORD98 "(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.)
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed pricesare quoted in US. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable inU.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
I
I
I
b%
NOTES
Section 9 Index
A i r Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28. 2.54
Servicing ....................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
What Will You See Afterit Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Antenna.Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Antifreeze ......................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57. 4.7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
AppearanceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Automatic
7-39
Transmission Check ...........................
6-17
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Transmission Operation ........................
2-21
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Axle
LockingRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-31
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
8-9
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
4-20
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Brake
6-31
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
6-27
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
9-1
Brakes (Continued)
System Waming Light
......................... 2-56
Trailer ...................................... 4-33
Transrniission Shift Interlock Check ............... 7-40
Wear ....................................... 6-30
Brakes., Anti-Lock ............................... 4-7
Braking ........................................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ........................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle .......................... 2-17
Brightness Control .............................. 2-40
BTSI Check ................................... 7-40
Bulb Rqlacement .............................. 6-32
9-2
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
3- 16. 3.20
Compact Disc Player .......................
2-48
Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2-46
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
5- 14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
Crankcase Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
2-37
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders ....................................
2-48
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
8-2
Damage.
Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
SheetMetal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
5-3
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects.ReportingSafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10. 8.11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
3.4
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.
3.3.
3.4
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
Door
2-4
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
StoragePocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Swing-Out Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Drive Position. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
6-5
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
4-21
OnSnowandIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-17
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-3
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
6-61
Electrical Equipment. Adding ....................
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Electronic Road Speed Governor (Gasoline Engines) . . . 2-53
9-3
~
.
-
=
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
7-38
Coolant Level Check ..........................
Coolant Temperature Gage .....................
2-57
5- 14
CoolingSystem ..............................
Exhaust ......................
Manual
Language
2.29.2.30.2.33 .4.26
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Identification ...........................
6.60.6.67
OilLevelCheck ..............................
7-38
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Running While Parked .........................
2-30
2- 18
Starting Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ...........................
6-12
EngineOil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil (Continued)
Checking ...................................
6-13
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-60
6-16
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29.2-30,2-33, 4-26
2-40
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
6-52
6-7
6-5
6-16
6-55
6-57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
First Gear. Automatic Transmission
5-2
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
FlatTire.Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
7-44
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5..
........................... 11
French
Front Parkingnurn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-35
2-48
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-7
Filling a Portable Container ......................
6-5
FillingYourTank ..............................
2-63
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-69
Tankcapacity ...............................
6-61
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-57
2-60
Engine Oil Pressure ...........................
2-63
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer .................................
2-52
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
4-27
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
4-27..
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
2-40
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
BulbReplacement ............................
High/Low Beam Changer ......................
2-35
2-41
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
HeaterIAir Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-6
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
High-Beam Headlamps ..........................
4-2 I
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-32
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood
Checking Things Under .........................
(5-8
Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
4-17
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
6-42
Inflation, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 42
7-43
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-42
Engine Cooling System ........................
7-42
Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
7-42
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
2-51
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
JJump
ack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Labels
Certification .................................
4-27
Certificationmire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-60
Tire-Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Lamps
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
2-40
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2-44
Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-27
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Lights
1-28, 2-54
Air Bag Readiness .......................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 4-7
2-56
Brake System Warning .........................
ChargingSystem ............................. 2-54
2-62
CheckGages ................................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............... 2-62
Exterior ....................................
2-40
2-43
Interior .....................................
1- 12, 2-53
Safety Belt Reminder .....................
2-61
Security ....................................
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
4-27
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2-4
Door ........................................
Ignition Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
PowerDoor ..................................
2-5
2-5
RearDoorSecurity .............................
Sliding Door Child Security......................
2-6
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
7-44
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-39
Lubrication Service, Body ........................
Maintenance. Normal Replacement parts ........... 6-69
7-46
MaintenanceRecord ............................
7-1
Maintenance Schedule ............................
Long Tripmighway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Long Tripmighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-7
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
9-6
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Periodic Maintenance Inspections ................ 7-42
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-8
Short Trip/City ................................
Short Trip/City Definition .......................
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
6-58
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
2-58
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
ManualFrontSeat ........,...................... l-2
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
2-47
Camper-Type ................................
Convex Outside ..............................
2-46
2-45
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Visorvanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
MMT .........................................
6-4
ModelReference .................................
vi
4-21
MountainRoads ................................
Multifunction Lever .............................
2-34
Neutral. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
New Vehicle Break-In ...........................
2-17
4-14
Nightvision ...................................
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Odometer ....................................
Odometer. Trip .................................
2-52
2-52
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil. Engine ....................................
Overheating Engine .............................
Owner Checks and Services .......................
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1.
4- 1 1
6-12
5- 11
7-38
8- I2
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-58
Park
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-25
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
BrakeMechanismCheck .......................
7-41
2-16
Lots .......................................
Over Things That Burn ........................
2-29
4-36
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing
...................................
4-11
2-16
Passlock8 *. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Power
Antenna Mast Care ............................
3-27
DoorLocks ...................................
2-5
2-45
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8- 12
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
3-23
Radio Reception ................................
3-7.3-9.3-11. 3- 16
Radios ..........................
4-15
Rain. Driving In ................................
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Rear
6-21
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
DoorSecurityLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-34
1-34
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear Heater Controls (without Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Passenger Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
2-45
Rearview Mirror ................................
1-3
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
6-70
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
Remote Compact Disc Player .....................
3-20
Replacement
6-66
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-69
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-62
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 10. 8- 1 1
Reporting Safety Defects ....................
9-7
Restraints
1-6 1
Checking ...................................
1-46
Child .......................................
1-5
Head ........................................
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7-39
System Check ................................
Reverse. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
1-26
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
8-5
Roadside Assistance ..............................
Roadside Assistance. Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle ...........................
5-36
6-43
Rotation. Tires .................................
Safety Belt Extender ............................
1-61
Safety Belts ...................................
1-11
Adults ......................................
1-17
Care .......................................
6-54
1-39
Center Passenger Position ......................
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Children .................................... l-41
1-17
Driver Position ...............................
Extender ..........,......................... l-61
1- 17
How to Wear Properly .........................
Incorrect Usage ....................
1-20, 1-59, 1-60
LapBelt .................................... l-40
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
1-17, 1-34
LargerChildren ..............................
1-58
Passenger Position .............................
1-26
Questions and Answers ........................
1- 16
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1-33
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
9-8
Reminder Light .........................
1.12. 2.53
Replacing After a Crash ........................
1-62
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41. 1-44
1-25
Use During Pregnancy .........................
WhyTheyWork ..............................
1-13
Safety Chains ..................................
4-33
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10. 8-11
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-4
1-3
Seatback Reclining ...............................
Seats
1-2
ManualFront .................................
Power ....................................... l-3
Rear ........................................ l-5
RemovingRear ...............................
1-6
Replacing Rear ................................
1-9
Restraint Systems ..............................
1-1
Seat Controls .................................
1-2
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52, 1-54, 1-55
Second Gear, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Security Light ..................................
2-61
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins, Ordering .......................
8-1 1,8- 12
2-58
Engine Soon Light ............................
7-39
Key Lock Cylinder ............................
8- 11, 8- 12
Manuals, Ordering .......................
6-60
Parts Identification Label .......................
8- 11, 8- 12
Publications, Ordering ....................
6-2
Work, Doing Your Own .........................
Service and Appearance Care ......................
6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 1 1. 8. 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-57
ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21.2.25
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
2-28
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.19
Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
2-35
SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
6-52
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-40
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
5-12
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-8
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Speed Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
StorageAreas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6-3 1
Storage. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
3-25
TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control. Rear Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-21
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..........................
Thermostat ....................................
6-25
Third Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-34
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
6-50
Tirechains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
6-45
Dual Operation ...............................
6-42
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
Inspection and Rotation ........................
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
6-42
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-45
Wear Indicators ..............................
6-49
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
When It’s Time for New .......................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-51
TopStrap
TorqueLock ...................................
2-27
5.33.6.67
Torque. Wheel Nut .........................
Towing a Trailer ................................
4-28
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle .............................
Trailer
Brakes ..................................... 4-33
4-35
Driving on Grades ............................
4-33
Drivingwith .................................
4-32
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-36
4-36
Parking on Hills ..............................
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-31
Tongueweight ...............................
..........................
4-32
Total Weight on Tires
4-28
Towing .....................................
4-35
Turnsignals .................................
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Wiring Harness ............................... 4-37
Transmission Fluid. Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 17
2-6
Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................
8-8
Transportation.Courtesy ..........................
Trip Odometer .................................
2-52
8-4
TTYUsers .....................................
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Turn SignalNultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Underbody Maintenance ........................
6-58
UnderhoodLamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DamageWarnings ..............................
IdentificationNumber .........................
Loading ....................................
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation System ...............................
VisorVanity Mirrors ............................
Visors. Sun ....................................
4-5
iv
6-60
4-27
6-31
3-6
2-49
2-49
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
6-26
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
WashingYourVehicle ...........................
6-55
6-54
Weatherstrips ..................................
Wheel
6-48
Alignment ..................................
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33. 6.67
6-49
Replacement .................................
5-24
Wrench .....................................
2-31
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power ......................................
2-31
2-32
SideLatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Swing-Out ..................................
WindshieldWasher .............................
2-37
6-26
Fluid .......................................
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
2-36
WindshieldWiper ..............................
6-40
BladeReplacement ...........................
6-54
Cleaning the Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Fuses ......................................
4-23
Winter Driving .................................
Wiper Blade
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Wiring.
Headlamp
.............................. 6-61
Wiper Blade Check .............................
7-39
Wrecker
Towing .................................
5-8
Wrench.
Wheel .................................
5-24
9-11
*
Service Station Checkpoints
BATTERY
P6-31
TIRES
P6-41
ENGINE COOLANT
RECOVERY TANK
P6-23*
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
P6-9
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-26
I
HOOD RELEASE
P6-8
I
FUEL DOOR
P6-5*
For detailed information, refer to the page number listed,or see the index in the back of the owner’s manual.
* For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, see the Diesel Supplement.
9-12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement